5. 婆罗门品显示巴利原文
5. Brāhmaṇavaggo
1. 梵摩经注显示巴利原文
1. Brahmāyusuttavaṇṇanā
383 “如是我闻”等语,是《梵摩经》。其中,“与大比丘僧团俱”(mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ)的“大”,既指功德之大,也指数目之大。因为此比丘僧团具足少欲等功德,故在功德上实为宏大;在数目上亦是大,共有五百位比丘。“比丘僧团”即比丘组成的团体,也就是依共同的见与戒和合而住的沙门众。“俱”即一起。“与五百位比丘”中的“五百”,即指那五百位比丘。“量”是说尺度、数量。因此,如同“于食知量”意指对食物知适量、知限度,此处也应这样理解:那五百位比丘的“五百”,即是五百之数。比丘之百数,即比丘百众。与那五百位比丘一起。显示巴利原文
383.Evaṃme sutanti brahmāyusuttaṃ. Tattha mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti mahatāti guṇamahattenapi mahatā, saṅkhyāmahattenapi. So hi bhikkhusaṅghe guṇehipi mahā ahosi appicchatādiguṇasamannāgatattā, saṅkhyāyapi mahā pañcasatasaṅkhyattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghena bhikkhusaṅghena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātasaṅkhātena samaṇagaṇenāti attho. Saddhinti ekato. Pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehīti pañca mattā etesanti pañcamattāni. Mattāti pamāṇaṃ vuccati, tasmā yathā bhojane mattaññūti vutte bhojane mattaṃ jānāti pamāṇaṃ jānātīti attho hoti, evamidhāpi tesaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañcamattā pañcapamāṇanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhūnaṃ satāni bhikkhusatāni. Tehi pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.
“百二十岁者”(Vīsavassasatiko),指超过一百二十岁。“三吠陀”(tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ),即《梨俱吠陀》《夜柔吠陀》《娑摩吠陀》。“达彼岸者”(pāragū),因依凭口诵而达至究竟,故称达彼岸。他与《尼犍度》(nighaṇḍu)及《克吒跋》(keṭubha)同具,故为“具尼犍度克吒跋者”(sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ)。“尼犍度”,是阐明树木等事物名称及其异名的学问;“克吒跋”,则是为诗人们提供助益的、有关仪轨法则的典籍。与“文字分”(akkharappabheda)同具,故为“具文字分者”(sakkharappabhedānaṃ)。“文字分”,即语音学与训诂学。“以古传说为第五者”(itihāsapañcamānaṃ):以《阿闼婆吠陀》(āthabbaṇaveda)为第四,而以“古传说”(itihāsa)——那与“此曾有,此曾有”等语句相关联的古代故事——为第五,因此称为“以古传说为第五者”。通达章句及其余文法,并广为解说,故为“章句文法家”显示巴利原文
Vīsavassasatikoti vīsādhikavassasatiko. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti iruvedayajuvedasāmavedānaṃ. Oṭṭhapahatakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gatoti pāragū. Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena ca sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ, nighaṇḍūti nāmanighaṇṭurukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṃ upakārāya satthaṃ. Saha akkharappabhedena sakkharappabhedānaṃ. Akkharappabhedoti sikkhā ca nirutti ca. Itihāsapañcamānanti āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha āsa itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanappaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā, tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ. Padañca tadavasesañca byākaraṇaṃ adhīyati pavedeti cāti padako veyyākaraṇo. Lokāyataṃ vuccati vitaṇḍavādasatthaṃ. Mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti mahāpurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ lakkhaṇadīpakaṃ dvādasasahassaganthappamāṇaṃ satthaṃ, yattha soḷasasahassagāthāparimāṇāya buddhamantā nāma ahesuṃ, yesaṃ vasena ‘‘iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgatā buddhā nāma honti, iminā paccekabuddhā nāma honti, iminā dve aggasāvakā, asītimahāsāvakā, buddhamātā, buddhapitā, aggupaṭṭhāko, aggupaṭṭhāyikā, rājā cakkavattī’’ti ayaṃ viseso ñāyati. Anavayoti imesu lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anūno paripūrakārī, avayo na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avayo nāma yo tāni atthato ca ganthato ca sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti. Assosi khotiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sāleyyakasutte (ma. ni. 1.439 ādayo) vuttameva.
384 “我儿……是这样”(Ayaṃ tātā):这位婆罗门因老迈不能亲自前往,便召唤学童,这样说道。再者,那婆罗门心中思惟:“在这世间,有不少人打着‘我是佛、我是佛’的名号到处游走,因此我不应仅凭传闻便去亲近。有些人若是去亲近了,即便想退回来也会很困难,甚至可能招来祸患。不如我派这名学童先去,弄清楚‘他究竟是不是佛’,然后再决定是否该去亲近?”于是,他召唤学童,说道:“我儿……是这样”等等。“那位尊者”(taṃ bhavantaṃ),指那位尊贵者。“如实如此者”(tathā santaṃyeva),是对事实的确认,此为描述既成状态的业格用法。“然则我当如何而知,尊?”(yathākathaṃ panāhaṃ, bho),其意思是:尊啊,我将以何种方式了解那位乔达摩尊呢?请将能够如实知晓他的方法告诉我。或者,此处“如何”(yathā)也可仅作一个不变词。“以何相”(kathanti),是询问特征,意思是:我应以什么特征来辨识乔达摩尊呢?显示巴利原文
384.Ayaṃ tātāti ayaṃ mahallakatāya gantuṃ asakkonto māṇavaṃ āmantetvā evamāha. Apica esa brāhmaṇo cintesi ‘‘imasmiṃ loke ‘ahaṃ buddho ahaṃ buddho’ti uggatassa nāmaṃ gahetvā bahū janā vicaranti, tasmā na me anussavamatteneva upasaṅkamituṃ yuttaṃ. Ekaccañhi upasaṅkamantassa apakkamanampi garu hoti, anatthopi uppajjati. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ mama antevāsikaṃ pesetvā ‘buddho vā no vā’ti jānitvā upasaṅkameyya’’nti tasmā māṇavaṃ āmantetvā ‘‘ayaṃ tātā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ bhavantanti tassa bhavato. Tathā santaṃyevāti tathā satoyeva. Idañhi itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Yathākathaṃ panāhaṃ, bhoti ettha kathaṃ panāhaṃ, bho, taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ jānissāmi, yathā sakkā so ñātuṃ, tathā me ācikkhāti attho. Yathāti vā nipātamattamevetaṃ. Kathanti ayaṃ ākārapucchā, kenākārenāhaṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ jānissāmīti attho.
据说,当他这样说时,他的戒师便对他说道:“儿啊,你怎么说这样的话,就像站在大地上却说看不到大地,站在日月的光辉中却说看不到日月一样。”然后,为了显示能知道的方式,戒师说:“儿啊,在诸咒语中,大人相的传述已经传下来了……”等等。在那里,「咒语中」(mantesu)即指吠陀中。据说,在如来将要出现之前,净居天们就把大人相放入吠陀中,说“这些名为佛咒语”,并以婆罗门的身份传诵吠陀,说:“依此传承,大有威力的众生将能认识如来。”因此,往昔在吠陀中大人相得以流传。然而如来般涅槃后,这些大人相便渐次隐没,所以现今已不存在了。「大人」(mahāpurisassa)指具足愿力、摄持、智慧、悲悯等功德的大人。「唯有两种趣向」(dveyeva gatiyo)即只有两种归宿。应知虽然“趣向”(gati)一词:在“舍利弗,这些有五种趣向”(pañca kho imā, sāriputta, gatiyo)等处,指生存的差别;在“兽之去处是山林”(gati migānaṃ pavanaṃ)等处,指住处;在“如是志深趣者”(evaṃ adhimattagatimanto)等处,指智慧;在“已到趣者”(gatigata)等处,指分散状态。但在本文此处,是指归宿。这其中,虽然具足那些大人相而成为转轮王者,与具足大人相而成为佛者并不相同,但仅从种类的共性上说,还是称这些为大人相。因此说:“凡具足彼诸相者……”(yehi samannāgatassā)。如果居家(sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasati),意思是:若居家中,就成为转轮王。因为以四种奇特法和四摄事使世间喜乐,所以称为「王」(rājā)。他使轮宝转动,以四种成就轮而转动,以此带动他人,并且为了他人利益而运转威仪之轮,所以称为「转轮王」(cakkavattī)。这里,“王”是一般称谓,“转轮王”是特别说明。「以法而行」(dhammena caratīti dhammiko),就是以正义、平等而行的意思。已得法王之位而生为王,所以称为「法王」(dhammarājā)。或者,以作利他之法而称为「法行者」(dhammiko),以作自利之法而称为「法王」。「于四边自在」(caturantāya issaro)即成为「四海为边者」(cāturanto):对以四海为界、以四类洲为庄严的大地而得自在的意思。「内制嗔等诸敌,外服一切王」所以称为「征服者」(vijitāvī)。「得地方稳固」(janapadatthāvariyappatto)意思是:已使国土获得坚固、恒常之性,不会被任何人动摇。或者,国土在他之下获得了安定、无扰乱而各自从事自己的业、不动摇,因此称为「得地方稳固者」。「所谓」(seyyathidanti)是不变化词,意为“他那些是什么?”即“轮宝……”(cakkaratanaṃ)等。在这里,「轮」(cakka)又因能令人喜悦而称为「宝」(ratana),所以叫「轮宝」(cakkaratana)。一切处都可类推。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte kira naṃ upajjhāyo – ‘‘kiṃ tvaṃ, tāta, pathaviyaṃ ṭhito pathaviṃ na passāmīti viya candimasūriyānaṃ obhāse ṭhito candimasūriye na passāmīti viya vadasī’’tiādīni vatvā jānanākāraṃ dassento āgatāni kho tātātiādimāha. Tattha mantesūti vedesu. Tathāgato kira uppajjissatīti paṭikacceva suddhāvāsā devā vedesu lakkhaṇāni pakkhipitvā ‘‘buddhamantā nāma ete’’ti brāhmaṇavesena vede vācenti ‘‘tadanusārena mahesakkhā sattā tathāgataṃ jānissantī’’ti. Tena pubbe vedesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni āgacchanti. Parinibbute pana tathāgate anukkamena antaradhāyanti, tena etarahi natthi. Mahāpurisassāti paṇidhisamādānañāṇakaruṇādiguṇamahato purisassa. Dveyeva gatiyoti dve eva niṭṭhā . Kāmañcāyaṃ gatisaddo – ‘‘pañca kho imā , sāriputta, gatiyo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.153) bhavabhede vattati, ‘‘gati migānaṃ pavana’’ntiādīsu (pari. 339) nivāsaṭṭhāne, ‘‘evaṃ adhimattagatimanto’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.161) paññāya, ‘‘gatigata’’ntiādīsu visaṭabhāve, idha pana niṭṭhāyaṃ vattatīti veditabbo. Tattha kiñcāpi yehi samannāgato rājā hoti, na teheva buddho hoti, jātisāmaññato pana tāniyeva tānīti vuccanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yehi samannāgatassā’’ti. Sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasatīti yadi agāre vasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī. Catūhi acchariyadhammehi saṅgahavatthūhi ca lokaṃ rañjanato rājā. Cakkaratanaṃ vatteti, catūhi sampatticakkehi vatteti, tehi ca paraṃ vatteti, parahitāya ca iriyāpathacakkānaṃ vatto etasmiṃ atthīti cakkavattī. Ettha ca rājāti sāmaññaṃ, cakkavattīti visesanaṃ. Dhammena caratīti dhammiko, ñāyena samena vattatīti attho. Dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jātoti dhammarājā. Parahitadhammakaraṇena vā dhammiko, attahitadhammakaraṇena dhammarājā. Caturantāya issaroti cāturanto, catusamuddantāya catubbidhadīpabhūsitāya ca pathaviyā issaroti attho. Ajjhattaṃ kopādipaccatthike bahiddhā ca sabbarājāno vijesīti vijitāvī. Janapadatthāvariyappattoti janapade thāvarabhāvaṃ dhuvabhāvaṃ patto, na sakkā kenaci cāletuṃ, janapado vā tamhi thāvariyappatto anussukko sakammanirato acalo asampavedhīti janapadatthāvariyappatto. Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa tāni katamānīti attho. Cakkaratanantiādīsu cakkañca taṃ ratijananatthena ratanañcāti cakkaratanaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbattha.
在这些宝物之中,转轮王以轮宝征服未征服的疆土,以象宝、马宝在已征服的境内随意巡行,以典兵宝守护已征服的国土,以其余诸宝享受受用之乐。这其中,凭轮宝成就精勤威力之结合;凭象宝、马宝、居士诸宝成就支配威力之结合;凭最后的典兵宝成就计谋威力之结合,极为圆满。而女宝、珠宝乃是三种威力结合之果。转轮王凭女宝与珠宝享受受用之乐,凭其余诸宝享受自在之乐。更应了知:前三宝是由无嗔善根所造业之威力而成就,中三宝是由无贪善根所造业之威力而成就,最后一宝是由无痴善根所造业之威力而成就。这是此处的纲要,详细解释应从《觉支相应·中宝经》的教导中汲取。在《愚者与贤者经》中,也将附带说明这些宝物出现的次第。显示巴利原文
Imesu pana ratanesu ayaṃ cakkavattirājā cakkaratanena ajitaṃ jināti, hatthiassaratanehi vijite yathāsukhaṃ anuvicarati, pariṇāyakaratanena vijitamanurakkhati, sesehi upabhogasukhamanubhavati. Paṭhamena cassa ussāhasattiyogo, hatthiassagahapatiratanehi pabhusattiyogo, pacchimena mantasattiyogo suparipuṇṇo hoti, itthimaṇiratanehi tividhasattiyogaphalaṃ. So itthimaṇiratanehi bhogasukhamanubhavati, sesehi issariyasukhaṃ. Visesato cassa purimāni tīṇi adosakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjanti, majjhimāni alobhakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena, pacchimamekaṃ amohakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvenāti veditabbaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte ratanasuttassa (saṃ. ni. 5.222-223) upadesato gahetabbo. Apica bālapaṇḍitasuttepi (ma. ni. 3.255) imesaṃ ratanānaṃ uppattikkamena saddhiṃ vaṇṇanā āgamissati.
「逾千」(Parosahassanti),即超过一千。「勇悍」(sūrā),指禀性无所畏惧的人。「具勇相之形」(vīraṅgarūpā)——有人解释为身如天人一般,但此处实际意义是:最胜的勇士称为「勇者」(vīrā)。勇士的构成部分即是「勇相」(vīraṅga),意思是勇士之因,即精进。具有此勇相之形的人,便是「具勇相之形」,表示其身体似是精进力所构成。「能摧破他军」(parasenappamaddanā)意思是:如果敌军正面而来,他们能将其摧破。「依法」(dhammenāti),就是指依止“不应杀生”等五戒之法。显示巴利原文
Parosahassanti atirekasahassaṃ. Sūrāti abhīrukajātikā. Vīraṅgarūpāti devaputtasadisakāyā, evaṃ tāva eke vaṇṇayanti, ayaṃ panettha sabhāvo – vīrāti uttamasūrā vuccanti. Vīrānaṃ aṅgaṃ vīraṅgaṃ, vīrakāraṇaṃ vīriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vīraṅgaṃ rūpaṃ etesanti vīraṅgarūpā, vīriyamayasarīrā viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Parasenappamaddanāti sace paṭimukhaṃ tiṭṭheyya parasenā, taṃ maddituṃ samatthāti adhippāyo. Dhammenāti ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’tiādinā pañcasīladhammena.
「是阿拉汉、正自觉者,于世间为揭开覆盖者」:此处,所谓「揭开覆盖者」,是指被贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、无明、恶行这七种覆盖所遮蔽的烦恼黑暗之世间,他揭去那些覆盖,令光明从一切方所生起而安住,故为「揭开覆盖者」。其中当知:第一词(阿拉汉)说明应受供养之义;第二词(正自觉者)说明其因——因为是正自觉者;第三词则说明成为佛陀之因,即揭开覆盖之德。或者,「揭开覆盖」即开显与去除覆盖,也就是无轮回、无覆盖。如此,「阿拉汉」由无轮回故,「正自觉者」由无覆盖故,前二词各各说明了其因。又,于此,以第二无畏成就第一,以第一无畏成就第二,以第三、第四无畏成就第三。还应了知:第一成就法眼,第二成就佛眼,第三成就一切眼。「你是咒语的承受者」——以此激发他的勇悍之心。显示巴利原文
Arahaṃ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchadoti ettha rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhiavijjāduccaritachadanehi sattahi paṭicchanne kilesandhakāraloke taṃ chadanaṃ vivaṭṭetvā samantato sañjātāloko hutvā ṭhitoti vivaṭṭacchado. Tattha paṭhamena padena pūjārahatā, dutiyena tassā hetu yasmā sammāsambuddhoti, tatiyena buddhattahetubhūtā vivaṭṭacchadatā vuttāti veditabbā. Atha vā vivaṭṭo ca vicchado cāti vivaṭṭacchado, vaṭṭarahito chadanarahito cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena arahaṃ vaṭṭābhāvena, sammāsambuddho chadanābhāvenāti evaṃ purimapadadvayasseva hetudvayaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Dutiyavesārajjena cettha purimasiddhi, paṭhamena dutiyasiddhi, tatiyacatutthehi tatiyasiddhi hoti. Purimañca dhammacakkhuṃ, dutiyaṃ buddhacakkhuṃ, tatiyaṃ samantacakkhuṃ sādhetītipi veditabbaṃ. Tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetāti imināssa sūrabhāvaṃ janeti.
385 他听了老师这番话,对诸大人相便彻底离了迷惑,如同遍照光明一般,于佛陀诸相好中正观察时,如是说道:‘尊者,是。’其意为:‘尊者,如您对我所说,我定当照办。’所谓‘审察’,即寻求,逐一计数而加以汇集观察。‘他见到了’:是如何见到的呢?因为诸佛或坐或卧时,无人能遍观大人相;而站立或经行时则可。因此,见到为寻相而来的人,诸佛便从座起身,或站立,或决意经行。如是,于适合见相的威仪中行持时,他见到了。‘大多’:即大部分,见到了许多相,有少数未见到。为说明未见之相,故说‘除了两相’。‘他期望’:即生起‘啊,但愿我能见到’的希求。‘他疑惑’:即从各方面寻思彼相,因难以彻见而感到困难。‘他不决定’:即因彼疑惑而不能达至决断。‘他不净信’:即因此对世尊不生于‘此具足大人相’的净信。或者,弱者为期望,中者为疑惑,强者为不决定,而所谓不净信,便是由此三法而心浑浊的状态。‘为衣所覆’:即被衣囊所遮蔽。‘于衣下之私处’:即生殖器。世尊的生殖器如象王般为衣所覆,呈金色,犹如莲苞。他因被衣遮蔽,又因舌入口中,故未能察觉其广长之相。显示巴利原文
385. Sopi tāya ācariyakathāya lakkhaṇesu vigatasammoho ekobhāsajāto viya buddhamante sampassamāno evaṃ, bhoti āha. Tassattho – yathā, bho, maṃ tvaṃ vadasi, evaṃ karissāmīti. Samannesīti gavesi, ekaṃ dveti vā gaṇayanto samānayi. Addasā khoti kathaṃ addasa? Buddhānañhi nisinnānaṃ vā nipannānaṃ vā koci lakkhaṇaṃ pariyesituṃ na sakkoti, ṭhitānaṃ pana caṅkamantānaṃ vā sakkoti. Tasmā lakkhaṇapariyesanatthaṃ āgataṃ disvā buddhā uṭṭhāyāsanā tiṭṭhanti vā caṅkamaṃ vā adhiṭṭhahanti. Iti lakkhaṇadassanānurūpe iriyāpathe vattamānassa addasa. Yebhuyyenāti pāyena, bahukāni addasa, appāni na addasāti attho. Tato yāni na addasa, tesaṃ dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ ṭhapetvā dveti. Kaṅkhatīti ‘‘aho vata passeyya’’nti patthanaṃ uppādeti. Vicikicchatīti tato tato tāni vicinanto kicchati na sakkoti daṭṭhuṃ. Nādhimuccatīti tāya vicikicchāya sanniṭṭhānaṃ na gacchati. Na sampasīdatīti tato ‘‘paripuṇṇalakkhaṇo aya’’nti bhagavati pasādaṃ nāpajjati. Kaṅkhāya vā dubbalā vimati vuttā, vicikicchāya majjhimā, anadhimuccanatāya balavatī, asampasādena tehi tīhi dhammehi cittassa kālussiyabhāvo. Kosohiteti vatthikosena paṭicchanne. Vatthaguyheti aṅgajāte. Bhagavato hi vāraṇasseva kosohitavatthaguyhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ padumagabbhasamānaṃ, taṃ so vatthapaṭicchannattā, antomukhagatāya ca jivhāya pahūtabhāvaṃ asallakkhento tesu dvīsu lakkhaṇesu kaṅkhī ahosi vicikicchī.
那时,世尊如是思惟:‘我若不向他展示此二相,他便不能无疑。若他有疑,其导师便不得无疑,如是则导师不会来见我,不来便不得闻法,不闻法则不能证得三种沙门果。然而,若他无疑惑,其导师便也无惑,便会来亲近我,得闻法后,便能证得三种沙门果。我正是为此目的,方才圆满诸波罗蜜。我将为他展示他们相。’显示巴利原文
Atha kho bhagavāti atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ imassa etāni dve lakkhaṇāni na dassessāmi, nikkaṅkho na bhavissati. Etassa kaṅkhāya sati ācariyopissa nikkaṅkho na bhavissati, atha maṃ dassanāya na āgamissati, anāgato dhammaṃ na sossati, dhammaṃ asuṇanto tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni na sacchikarissati. Etasmiṃ pana nikkaṅkhe ācariyopissa nikkaṅkho maṃ upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ sutvā tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni sacchikarissati. Etadatthaṃyeva ca mayā pāramiyo pūritā. Dassessāmissa tāni lakkhaṇānī’’ti.
他示现了如是的神变。是怎样的呢?此处何须再假他人之言?这正是那先长老被弥兰陀王问及时所说:显示巴利原文
Tathārūpaṃ iddhābhisaṅkhāramakāsi. Kathaṃrūpaṃ? Kimettha aññena vattabbaṃ? Vuttametaṃ nāgasenatthereneva milindaraññā puṭṭhena –
他说道:“尊者那先,世尊做了难行之事。”“大王,是什么事?”“尊者,世尊向梵摩婆罗门的内弟子乌多罗、巴婆利婆罗门的十六位弟子、施罗婆罗门的三百位青年,以及大众,展示了令人羞惭的部位。”“大王,世尊并不展示隐秘处,世尊展示的是影像。世尊以神通变化出穿戴整齐的影像——穿着下裙、系着腰带、披着上衣的影像而已。”“尊者,见到影像,难道不就是已经见了吗?”“大王,此事暂且搁置。若有众生见心脏色法而能觉悟,正自觉者便会取出心脏肉来展示。”“善哉,尊者那先。”显示巴利原文
Āha ca dukkaraṃ, bhante nāgasena, bhagavatā katanti. Kiṃ mahārājāti? Mahājanena hirikaraṇokāsaṃ brahmāyubrāhmaṇassa ca antevāsiuttarassa ca bāvariyassa antevāsīnaṃ soḷasabrāhmaṇānañca selassa ca brāhmaṇassa antevāsīnaṃ tisatamāṇavānañca dassesi, bhanteti. Na, mahārāja, bhagavā guyhaṃ dasseti, chāyaṃ bhagavā dasseti, iddhiyā abhisaṅkharitvā nivāsananivatthaṃ kāyabandhanabaddhaṃ cīvarapārutaṃ chāyārūpakamattaṃ dassesi mahārājāti. Chāyaṃ diṭṭhe sati diṭṭhoyeva. Nanu, bhanteti? Tiṭṭhatetaṃ, mahārāja, hadayarūpaṃ disvā bujjhanakasatto bhaveyya, hadayamaṃsaṃ nīharitvā dasseyya sammāsambuddhoti. Kallosi, bhante nāgasenāti.
“Ninnāmetvā”意为伸出(舌头)。“anumasī”意为将舌头作成缝衣针一般,随后搓揉。应知,如此处理,柔软性得以显现;通过搓揉耳孔,长性得以显现;通过搓揉鼻孔,细性得以显现;通过覆盖前额,广性得以显现。而关于“双耳孔”等处,诸佛的耳孔中并无垢秽或尘垢,犹如冲洗后静置的银管;鼻孔也是如此,犹如精工打造的金管或宝珠管。因此,世尊伸出舌头,作成缝衣针般,沿口腔边缘运用,先送入右耳孔,从彼处抽出后再送入左耳孔;从彼处抽出后送入右鼻孔,又从彼处抽出送入左鼻孔;其后,为显示广大,便以那条犹如红云遮蔽的半月、又如金片、亦如在红毯覆盖下放出闪电般光芒的舌头,遍覆整个前额轮相。显示巴利原文
Ninnāmetvāti nīharitvā. Anumasīti kathinasūciṃ viya katvā anumajji. Tathā karaṇena cettha mudubhāvo, kaṇṇasotānumasanena dīghabhāvo, nāsikasotānumasanena tanubhāvo, nalāṭacchādanena puthulabhāvo pakāsitoti veditabbo. Ubhopi kaṇṇasotānītiādīsu cettha buddhānaṃ kaṇṇasotesu malaṃ vā jallikā vā natthi, dhovitvā ṭhapitarajatapanāḷikā viya honti, tathā nāsikasotesu, tānipi hi suparikammakatakañcanapanāḷikā viya ca maṇipanāḷikā viya ca honti. Tasmā jivhaṃ nīharitvā kathinasūciṃ viya katvā mukhapariyante upasaṃharanto dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotaṃ pavesetvā tato nīharitvā vāmakaṇṇasotaṃ pavesesi, tato nīharitvā dakkhiṇanāsikasotaṃ pavesetvā tato nīharitvā vāmanāsikasotaṃ pavesesi, tato nīharitvā puthulabhāvaṃ dassento rattavalāhakena aḍḍhacandaṃ viya ca suvaṇṇapattaṃ viya ca rattakambalapaṭalena vijjujotasadisāya jivhāya kevalakappaṃ nalāṭamaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādesi.
他为何这样思惟:“我还是……”呢?因为,他观察了大丈夫相之后回去,若被导师问及:“贤者,你见到大丈夫相了吗?”他能回答:“是的,导师。”然而,若导师接着问:“他的行为举止如何?”他便无法回答了。如果他说“我不知道”,导师就会生气,心想:“你难道不是为了了解这一切才被我派去的吗?为何不知便回?”因此,他思惟“我还是……”之后,便跟随世尊。世尊除了沐浴处、洗脸处、护理身体处、与国王及王臣等后宫眷属共坐之处这四种地方之外,其余一切处所——乃至单独的香室——都给予了他机会。显示巴利原文
Yaṃnūnāhanti kasmā cintesi? Ahañhi mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni samannesitvā gato ‘‘diṭṭhāni te, tāta, mahāpurisalakkhaṇānī’’ti ācariyena pucchito ‘‘āma, ācariyā’’ti vattuṃ sakkhissāmi. Sace pana maṃ ‘‘kiriyākaraṇamassa kīdisa’’nti pucchissati , taṃ vattuṃ na sakkhissāmi, na jānāmīti vutte pana ācariyo kujjhissati ‘‘nanu tvaṃ mayā sabbampetaṃ jānanatthāya pesito, kasmā ajānitvā āgatosī’’ti, tasmā yannūnāhanti cintetvā anubandhi. Bhagavā nhānaṭṭhānaṃ mukhadhovanaṭṭhānaṃ sarīrapaṭijagganaṭṭhānaṃ rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃ orodhehi saddhiṃ parivāretvā nisinnaṭṭhānanti imāni cattāri ṭhānāni ṭhapetvā sesaṭṭhānesu antamaso ekagandhakuṭiyampi okāsamakāsi.
时日推移,这位梵摩婆罗门的青年乌多罗,因试探如来是否为佛而名声远播,人称“试探佛陀者”。诸佛所住之处,有五事已成定例,前文已述。其中,午后世尊端坐于庄严法座,手执象牙彩饰扇,为大众说法时,乌多罗亦在不远处就座。说法已,有信心的信众礼请世尊明日应供,并走近青年,说道:“朋友,我们已邀请世尊,也请您与世尊同来,于我等家中接受饮食。”次日,如来由比丘僧团围绕进入村落,乌多罗步步紧随,观察着如来的每一步。进入施主家时,从接受供养水起,他便观察一切,随后坐下。用斋毕,如来将钵置于地上而坐,此时人们才为青年备好早斋。他在一旁坐下进食,食毕又回到大师近旁,聆听饭后随喜开示,此后便与世尊同返寺院。显示巴利原文
Gacchante gacchante kāle – ‘‘ayaṃ kira brahmāyubrāhmaṇassa māṇavo uttaro nāma ‘buddho vā no vā’ti tathāgatassa buddhabhāvaṃ vīmaṃsanto carati, buddhavīmaṃsako nāmāya’’nti pākaṭo jāto. Yamhi yamhi ṭhāne buddhā vasanti, pañca kiccāni katāneva honti, tāni heṭṭhā dassitāneva . Tattha pacchābhattaṃ alaṅkatadhammāsane nisīditvā dantakhacitaṃ cittabījaniṃ gahetvā mahājanassa dhammaṃ desente bhagavati uttaropi avidūre nisīdati. Dhammassavanapariyosāne saddhā manussā svātanāya bhagavantaṃ nimantetvā māṇavampi upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘tāta, amhehi bhagavā nimantito, tvampi bhagavatā saddhiṃ āgantvā amhākaṃ gehe bhattaṃ gaṇheyyāsī’’ti. Punadivase tathāgato bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gāmaṃ pavisati, uttaropi padavāre padavāre pariggaṇhanto padānupadiko anubandhati. Kulagehaṃ paviṭṭhakāle dakkhiṇodakaggahaṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbaṃ olokento nisīdati. Bhattakiccāvasāne tathāgatassa pattaṃ bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā nisinnakāle māṇavakassa pātarāsabhattaṃ sajjenti. So ekamante nisinno bhuñjitvā puna āgantvā satthu santike ṭhatvā bhattānumodanaṃ sutvā bhagavatā saddhiṃyeva vihāraṃ gacchati.
其时,世尊在香殿中安坐,等待比丘们用斋完毕。比丘们用斋毕,收好钵与衣,回来顶礼世尊,于适当时候通报后,世尊便进入香室,青年亦随同前往。世尊立于香室门口,对围绕而来的比丘僧团予以教诫,遣散他们后进入香室,青年也随入。世尊在小床上稍坐片刻,青年亦在不远处注视着坐下。世尊坐了片刻,显出垂头欲卧之状。青年心想:“乔达摩尊者的静修时间到了”,便关好香室之门,出来退坐一面。信众于午前布施,用过早斋,受持布萨戒,身着洁净的郁多罗僧,手持花鬘、香等,心想“我们要去听法”而来到寺院,那情形犹如转轮圣王的宿营地一般。显示巴利原文
Tattha bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ bhattakiccapariyosānaṃ āgamento gandhamaṇḍalamāḷe nisīdati. Bhikkhūhi bhattakiccaṃ katvā pattacīvaraṃ paṭisāmetvā āgamma vanditvā kāle ārocite bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisati, māṇavopi bhagavatā saddhiṃyeva gacchati. Bhagavā parivāretvā āgataṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ gandhakuṭippamukhe ṭhito ovaditvā uyyojetvā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisati, māṇavopi pavisati. Bhagavā khuddakamañce appamattakaṃ kālaṃ nisīdati, māṇavopi avidūre olokento nisīdati. Bhagavā muhuttaṃ nisīditvā sīsokkamanaṃ dasseti, – ‘‘bhoto gotamassa vihāravelā bhavissatī’’ti māṇavo gandhakuṭidvāraṃ pidahanto nikkhamitvā ekamantaṃ nisīdati. Manussā purebhattaṃ dānaṃ datvā bhuttapātarāsā samādinnauposathaṅgā suddhuttarāsaṅgā mālāgandhādihatthā dhammaṃ suṇissāmāti vihāraṃ āgacchanti, cakkavattino khandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ viya hoti.
世尊以狮子卧姿卧片刻后起身,以初夜分界定时间,随即入于等至。从等至出定后,知大众已至,便从香室而出,于大众围绕中前往香殿,登上已敷设的最胜佛座,为大众说法。青年亦在不远处坐下,逐句审察:“这位沙门乔达摩,是否依于居家琐事而在说法中褒扬或贬低某些人呢,还是并没有?”世尊丝毫无有那样的言说,了知时节后便结束了说法。青年以此方式考察,随世尊一同经行七个月,于世尊的身门等处不见丝毫过失。这其实不足为奇:成佛之后,人间的青年是见不到他的过失的。当世尊尚为菩萨,精勤修习六年时,非人的魔罗天子尚且见不到一丝依于世俗的寻;成佛之后,魔罗追随一年亦无所见,便说了如下偈颂——显示巴利原文
Bhagavā muhuttaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappetvā vuṭṭhāya pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā samāpattiṃ samāpajjati. Samāpattito vuṭṭhāya mahājanassa āgatabhāvaṃ ñatvā gandhakuṭito nikkhamma mahājanaparivuto gandhamaṇḍalamāḷaṃ gantvā paññattavarabuddhāsanagato parisāya dhammaṃ deseti. Māṇavopi avidūre nisīditvā – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho samaṇo gotamo gehassitavasena parisaṃ ussādento vā apasādento vā dhammaṃ deseti, udāhu no’’ti akkharakkharaṃ padaṃ padaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Bhagavā tathāvidhaṃ kathaṃ akathetvāva kālaṃ ñatvā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Māṇavo iminā niyāmena pariggaṇhanto satta māse ekato vicaritvā bhagavato kāyadvārādīsu aṇumattampi avakkhalitaṃ na addasa. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ buddhabhūtassa manussabhūto māṇavo na passeyya, yassa bodhisattabhūtassa chabbassāni padhānabhūmiyaṃ amanussabhūto māro devaputto gehassitavitakkamattampi adisvā buddhabhūtaṃ ekasaṃvaccharaṃ anubandhitvā kiñci apassanto –
七年之中,我步步紧随世尊,
对那位正自觉者、具念者,我找不到任何可乘之机。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448) –
他说完这些开首的偈颂后,便离开了。于是,那位青年心想:“我跟随乔达摩尊者七个月,丝毫不见他有过失。纵使我再跟随他七个月、七年,乃至百年、千年,也绝不会见到他有过失。然而,我的老师已年迈,所谓的安稳处他无从知晓。我应当先说明沙门乔达摩凭借自性功德成就佛果的事实,再去禀告老师。”于是他向世尊告辞,礼敬比丘僧团后离去了。显示巴利原文
Ādigāthāyo vatvā pakkāmi. Tato māṇavo cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ satta māse anubandhamāno kiñci vajjaṃ na passāmi. Sace panāhaṃ aññepi satta māse satta vā vassāni vassasataṃ vā vassasahassaṃ vā anubandheyyaṃ, nevassa vajjaṃ passeyyaṃ. Ācariyo kho panassa me mahallako, yogakkhemaṃ nāma na sakkā jānituṃ. Samaṇassa gotamassa sabhāvaguṇeneva buddhabhāvaṃ vatvā mayhaṃ ācariyassa ārocessāmī’’ti bhagavantaṃ āpucchitvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vanditvā nikkhami.
他来到老师跟前,老师问道:“亲爱的优多罗,关于那位乔达摩尊者的传闻,是否真如其本人那样呢?”他答道:“老师,您这是什么话?对于乔达摩尊者来说,轮围山太狭小,有顶天也嫌低矮,因为乔达摩尊者的功德聚犹如虚空一般无有边际。确实如此,尊者,那位乔达摩尊者就是如其本身那样……”说完之后,他便依次讲述了自己亲眼所见的三十二大人相,并叙述了他的威仪行持。因此经中说:“那时,优多罗青年……那位乔达摩尊者是这样这样,而且远不止如此。”显示巴利原文
Ācariyassa santikañca pana gantvā – ‘‘kacci, tāta uttara, taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ tathāsantaṃyeva saddo abbhuggato’’ti pucchito, ‘‘ācariya, kiṃ vadesi? Cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ, bhavaggaṃ atinīcaṃ, tassa hi, bhoto gotamassa ākāsaṃ viya apariyanto guṇagaṇo. Tathāsantaṃyeva, bho, taṃ bhavantaṃ gotama’’ntiādīni vatvā yathādiṭṭhāni dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭipāṭiyā ācikkhitvā kiriyasamācāraṃ ācikkhi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho uttaro māṇavo…pe… ediso ca ediso ca bhavaṃ gotamo tato ca bhiyyo’’ti.
386 其中,“足善安立”(suppatiṭṭhitapādo):一般人把脚放在地上时,或是脚掌前端、脚跟、侧面先触地,或是中间悬空留有缝隙;抬脚时,也只是脚掌前端等某一部分先抬起。世尊则不然。世尊的脚,如同金鞋底一般,整个脚掌同时触地,又同时抬起。因此说:“那位乔达摩尊者确实是足善安立者。”显示巴利原文
386. Tattha suppatiṭṭhitapādoti yathā hi aññesaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pādaṃ ṭhapentānaṃ aggatalaṃ vā paṇhi vā passaṃ vā paṭhamaṃ phusati, vemajjhaṃ vā pana chiddaṃ hoti, ukkhipantānampi aggatalādīsu ekakoṭṭhāsova paṭhamaṃ uṭṭhahati, na evaṃ tassa. Tassa pana suvaṇṇapādukatalaṃ viya ekappahāreneva sakalaṃ pādatalaṃ bhūmiṃ phusati, bhūmito uṭṭhahati. Tasmā ‘‘suppatiṭṭhitapādo kho pana so bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti vadati.
世尊足善安立的特性如下:即使世尊伸出脚,想要踏在数百人深的深渊上,那低洼之处也会立刻像充满风的铁匠风箱一样鼓起,变得与地面齐平;而高凸之处则会自行陷下。当他向前伸出脚,想要踏向远处时,即便是如同须弥山那么大的山,也会像蒸软的藤芽一样弯下来,来到他的脚边。确实如此,当世尊示现双神变后,要踏在持双山上时,那座山便弯下来,来到他的脚边;世尊踏着它,以另一只脚跨上了三十三天。因为具有轮相之处,绝不可能是不平坦的。木桩、荆棘、瓦砾碎石、大小便、唾涕等,都事先自行消失,并各自没入地中。凭借如来的戒德威力、智慧威力、法之威力以及十种波罗蜜的威神力,这大地变得平坦柔软,铺满鲜花。如来将脚平正地放下,平正地抬起,以整个脚掌触地。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ bhagavato suppatiṭṭhitapādatāya – sacepi hi bhagavā anekasataporisaṃ narakaṃ akkamissāmīti pādaṃ nīharati, tāvadeva ninnaṭṭhānaṃ vātapūritaṃ viya kammārabhastaṃ unnamitvā pathavīsamaṃ hoti, unnataṭṭhānampi anto pavisati. Dūre akkamissāmīti abhinīharantassa sineruppamāṇopi pabbato seditavettaṅkuro viya namitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgacchati. Tathā hissa yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā yugandharapabbataṃ akkamissāmīti pāde abhinīharato pabbato namitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgato, so taṃ akkamitvā dutiyapādena tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ akkami. Na hi cakkalakkhaṇena patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānaṃ visamaṃ bhavituṃ sakkoti. Khāṇu vā kaṇḍako vā sakkharakathalā vā uccārapassāvo vā kheḷasiṅghāṇikādīni vā purimatarāva apagacchanti, tattha tattheva ca pathaviṃ pavisanti. Tathāgatassa hi sīlatejena paññātejena dhammatejena dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ ānubhāvena ayaṃ mahāpathavī samā mudu pupphābhikiṇṇā hoti. Tatra tathāgato samaṃ pādaṃ nikkhipati, samaṃ uddharati, sabbāvantehi pādatalehi bhūmiṃ phusati.
“轮”指两脚上有两个轮相。轮的辐、辋、毂,经中已说。“一切形貌皆圆满”这一句,应知其微细差别:据说,于他们轮之脚掌中央,可见毂;可见由毂所划分出的圆形线条;可见围绕毂的带状区域;可见毂孔口;可见辐;辐与辐之间可见圆形线条;可见辋;亦可见辋上的小环。这些均属经中所说。显示巴利原文
Cakkānīti dvīsu pādesu dve cakkāni. Tesaṃ arā ca nemi ca nābhi ca pāḷiyaṃ vuttāva. Sabbākāraparipūrānīti iminā pana ayaṃ viseso veditabbo – tesaṃ kira cakkānaṃ pādatalassa majjhe nābhi dissati, nābhiparicchinnā vaṭṭalekhā dissati, nābhimukhaparikkhepapaṭṭo dissati, panāḷimukhaṃ dissati, arā dissanti, aresu vaṭṭalekhā dissanti, nemī dissanti, nemimaṇikā dissanti. Idaṃ tāva pāḷiāgatameva.
然而“众多回”这一部分,经典未载,应当如是观:矛、吉祥、犊、喜旋、卍字、耳环、增长、双鱼、吉祥座、钩、刺棒、宫殿、拱门、白伞、剑、扇、孔雀尾扇、拂尘、头巾、钵、宝珠、花鬘、青莲、红莲、白莲、莲花、白睡莲、满瓶、满盘、大海、轮围山、雪山、须弥山、日月、星宿、四大洲、二千小洲,乃至转轮王的随从等,这一切皆是轮相的眷属。显示巴利原文
Sambahulavāro pana anāgato, so evaṃ daṭṭhabbo – satti siri vaccho nandi sovattiko vaṭaṃsako vaḍḍhamānakaṃ macchayugalaṃ bhaddapīṭhaṃ aṅkusaṃ tomaro pāsādo toraṇaṃ setacchattaṃ khaggo tālavaṇṭaṃ morahatthako vāḷabījanī uṇhīsaṃ patto maṇi kusumadāmaṃ nīluppalaṃ rattuppalaṃ setuppalaṃ padumaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ puṇṇaghaṭo puṇṇapāti samuddo cakkavāḷo himavā sineru candimasūriyā nakkhattāni cattāro mahādīpā dveparittadīpasahassāni, antamaso cakkavattirañño parisaṃ upādāya sabbo cakkalakkhaṇasseva parivāro.
“足跟广长”即长的脚跟,意为饱满浑圆的脚跟。因为一般人脚掌前端较长,小腿正对脚跟上方,脚跟像是被削平后安上去一般;而如来则非如此。如来的脚分四部分:前两部分为脚掌前端,第三部分为小腿所对之处,在第四部分,脚跟浑圆隆起,犹如用锥尖旋成后安上,宛如红色毛毯制成的球状。显示巴利原文
Āyatapaṇhīti dīghapaṇhi, paripuṇṇapaṇhīti attho. Yathā hi aññesaṃ aggapādo dīgho hoti, paṇhimatthake jaṅghā patiṭṭhāti, paṇhi tacchetvā ṭhapitā viya hoti, na evaṃ tathāgatassa . Tathāgatassa pana catūsu koṭṭhāsesu dve koṭṭhāsā aggapādo hoti, tatiye koṭṭhāse jaṅghā patiṭṭhāti, catutthe koṭṭhāse āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitā viya rattakambale geṇḍukasadisā paṇhi hoti.
「手指纤长」:常人中有的手指长,有的手指短,但如来并非如此。如来的手指与脚趾,犹如猿猴的长指,根部粗壮,朝指尖逐渐变细,像用树脂油揉搓后再捻成的蜡棍一般。因此称之为「手指纤长」。显示巴利原文
Dīghaṅgulīti yathā aññesaṃ kāci aṅguli dīghā hoti, kāci rassā, na evaṃ tathāgatassa. Tathāgatassa pana makkaṭasseva dīghahatthapādaṅguliyo mūle thūlā anupubbena gantvā agge tanukā niyyāsatelena madditvā vaṭṭitaharitālavaṭṭisadisā honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dīghaṅgulī’’ti.
「手足柔软」:他的手和脚,柔软得如同浸透醍醐后再取出的、捶打过百次的棉絮片,又如刚出生的婴儿,手足永葆幼嫩。因此称为「手足柔软」。显示巴利原文
Mudutalunahatthapādoti sappimaṇḍe osādetvā ṭhapitaṃ satavāravihatakappāsapaṭalaṃ viya mudū, jātamattakumārassa viya ca niccakālaṃ talunā ca hatthapādā assāti mudutalunahatthapādo.
「手足网缦」:并非指以皮肤连结指间。若有人手指间生有皮膜,那是有缺陷之人,连出家也不被许可。然而,如来的四根手指与五根脚趾,每一根都长短等同;正因为长短一致,指间纹路呈现出麦粒形纹,彼此交错。如此一来,他的手与脚,就如同巧匠制作的网格窗一般。因此说「手足网缦」。显示巴利原文
Jālahatthapādoti na cammena paṭibaddhaaṅgulantaro. Ediso hi phaṇahatthako purisadosena upahato pabbajjampi na labhati. Tathāgatassa pana catasso hatthaṅguliyo pañcapi pādaṅguliyo ekappamāṇā honti, tāsaṃ ekappamāṇattāya yavalakkhaṇaṃ aññamaññaṃ paṭivijjhitvā tiṭṭhati. Athassa hatthapādā kusalena vaḍḍhakinā yojitajālavātapānasadisā honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jālahatthapādo’’ti.
“脚踝不显”:因脚踝较高安立,故其足名为“脚踝不显之足”。常人脚踝位于脚背后方,因此他们的脚犹如被钉固般僵硬,不能自如转动,行走时脚掌不可见。而如来脚踝高高隆起,安立上方。以此因缘,其从脐以上的上半身,如安奉于船上的金像般端严不动,唯下半身活动。双足可轻松转动。无论立于前方、后方或是两侧瞻视之人,皆能见到如来脚掌,不似大象唯从后方得见。显示巴利原文
Uddhaṃ patiṭṭhitagopphakattā ussaṅkhā pādā assāti ussaṅkhapādo. Aññesañhi piṭṭhipāde gopphakā honti. Tena tesaṃ pādā āṇibaddhā viya thaddhā honti, na yathāsukhaṃ parivattanti, gacchantānaṃ pādatalāni na dissanti . Tathāgatassa pana abhiruhitvā upari gopphakā patiṭṭhahanti. Tenassa nābhito paṭṭhāya uparimakāyo nāvāya ṭhapitasuvaṇṇapaṭimā viya niccalo hoti, adhokāyova iñjati. Sukhena pādā parivattanti. Puratopi pacchatopi ubhayapassesupi ṭhatvā passantānaṃ pādatalāni paññāyanti, na hatthīnaṃ viya pacchatoyeva.
“小腿如羚羊”:即小腿如羚羊之腿,因肌肉丰满而圆润饱满。并非仅于一处结成团块的腿肚,而是被四周均匀分布的肌肉所围绕,具足圆满、如同稻粒般的小腿。这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Eṇijaṅghoti eṇimigasadisajaṅgho maṃsussadena paripuṇṇajaṅgho, na ekato baddhapiṇḍikamaṃso , samantato samasaṇṭhitena maṃsena parikkhittāhi suvaṭṭitāhi sāligabbhasadisāhi jaṅghāhi samannāgatoti attho.
“不弯腰”:即无需弯腰。此显示其不驼背、亦不矮小。因为其余之人,或驼背,或矮小:驼背者上半身不完整,矮小者下半身不完整。他们因身体不完整,无法不弯腰而摸到膝盖。而如来则因上下半身皆完整,故能不弯腰而触及膝盖。显示巴利原文
Anonamantoti anamanto. Etenassa akhujjaavāmanabhāvo dīpito. Avasesajanā hi khujjā vā honti vāmanā vā, khujjānaṃ uparimakāyo aparipuṇṇo hoti, vāmanānaṃ heṭṭhimakāyo. Te aparipuṇṇakāyattā na sakkonti anonamantā jaṇṇukāni parimajjituṃ. Tathāgato pana paripuṇṇaubhayakāyattā sakkoti.
“马阴藏相”:如公牛、象王等,密处如金色莲蕊般隐于鞘中,不露于外,故称“马阴藏相”。“密处”指应覆藏之处,即生殖器官。显示巴利原文
Usabhavāraṇādīnaṃ viya suvaṇṇapadumakaṇṇikasadise kose ohitaṃ paṭicchannaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ assāti kosohitavatthaguyho. Vatthaguyhanti vatthena gūhitabbaṃ aṅgajātaṃ vuccati.
“金色”:犹如以天然朱砂研磨、用野猪牙磨擦,再涂上赭石粉而制成的纯金雕像。此言先显其身坚实、润泽、柔软,进而为明肤色而说“肤似黄金”;或此句即是前“金色”之异名。显示巴利原文
Suvaṇṇavaṇṇoti jātihiṅgulakena majjitvā dīpidāṭhāya ghaṃsitvā gerukaparikammaṃ katvā ṭhapitaghanasuvaṇṇarūpakasadisoti attho. Etenassa ghanasiniddhasaṇhasarīrataṃ dassetvā chavivaṇṇadassanatthaṃ kañcanasannibhattacoti vuttaṃ, purimassa vā vevacanameva etaṃ.
“尘垢不染”:尘垢,即尘土与污垢。不染,指不附着,如水珠从荷叶上滚落一般。然而,洗手洗足等事,佛陀为顺应时节气候、令施主获得福报,亦依仪轨而作。因为教导中说:比丘进入住处时,应先洗足而后入。显示巴利原文
Rajojallanti rajo vā malaṃ vā. Na upalimpatīti na laggati, padumapalāsato udakabindu viya vivaṭṭati. Hatthadhovanapādadhovanādīni pana utuggahaṇatthāya ceva dāyakānaṃ puññaphalatthāya ca buddhā karonti, vattasīsenāpi ca karontiyeva. Senāsanaṃ pavisantena hi bhikkhunā pāde dhovitvā pavisitabbanti vuttametaṃ.
「身毛上靡」:指在发旋的末端,每一根毛发向上竖起,仿佛正仰望着面容的光辉;具足如此毛发者,便称为「身毛上靡」。显示巴利原文
Uddhaggalomoti āvaṭṭapariyosāne uddhaggāni hutvā mukhasobhaṃ ullokayamānāni viya ṭhitāni lomāni assāti uddhaggalomo.
「梵身正直」:指身体犹如梵天一般正直,亦即挺拔高大的身躯。因为多数众生在肩、腰、膝三处弯曲:腰部弯曲者向后弓,其余两处向前曲。有些身材高大者身形侧弯,有些人仰面而行,好像正在数着星宿一般;有些人血肉瘦薄,犹如标杆,行走时还会战抖。而如来则全然笔直地竖立,身长体高,犹如天城中竖立的金色拱门那样。显示巴利原文
Brahmujugattoti brahmā viya ujugatto, ujumeva uggatadīghasarīro. Yebhuyyena hi sattā khandhe kaṭiyaṃ jāṇūsūti tīsu ṭhānesu namanti. Te kaṭiyaṃ namantā pacchato namanti, itaresu dvīsu ṭhānesu purato. Dīghasarīrā paneke passavaṅkā honti, eke mukhaṃ unnāmetvā nakkhattāni gaṇayantā viya caranti, eke appamaṃsalohitā sūlasadisā honti, pavedhamānā gacchanti. Tathāgato pana ujumeva uggantvā dīghappamāṇo devanagare ussitasuvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya hoti.
「七处隆满」:指两手背、两脚背、两肩和颈项,这七处肌肉饱满隆起。其他人手背、脚背上筋脉浮现,肩头与颈项的骨端凸出,看上去犹如人饿鬼;如来则不然。如来正因这七处肌肉圆满丰腴,手背等处的筋脉都隐没在肉中,肩与颈项就像磨圆的黄金柱一般,看上去宛如石雕像或彩绘之像。显示巴利原文
Sattussadoti dve hatthapiṭṭhiyo dve pādapiṭṭhiyo dve aṃsakūṭāni khandhoti imesu sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsussado assāti sattussado. Aññesaṃ pana hatthapādapiṭṭhīsu nhārujālā paññāyanti, aṃsakūṭakhandhesu aṭṭhikoṭiyo, te manussapetā viya khāyanti, na tathāgato. Tathāgato pana sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsussadattā nigūḷhanhārujālehi hatthapiṭṭhādīhi vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitasuvaṇṇavaṇṇāliṅgasadisena khandhena silārūpakaṃ viya cittakammarūpakaṃ viya ca khāyati.
“上身如狮子”:指身体的前半部分犹如狮子。狮子的前半身圆满,后半身则不圆满。而如来的整个身体就像狮子的前半身那般圆满,并且也如同狮子一样,不会在任何地方出现弯曲、凹凸等不正或松散之态;该长之处即长,该短之处即短,该细之处即细,该粗之处即粗,该圆润之处即圆润,皆恰如其分。对此也曾有说:显示巴利原文
Sīhassa pubbaddhaṃ viya kāyo assāti sīhapubbaddhakāyo. Sīhassa hi puratthimakāyova paripuṇṇo hoti, pacchimakāyo aparipuṇṇo. Tathāgatassa pana sīhassa pubbaddhakāyova sabbo kāyo paripuṇṇo. Sopi sīhasseva na tattha tattha vinatunnatādivasena dussaṇṭhitavisaṇṭhito, dīghayuttaṭhāne pana dīgho, rassakisathūlaanuvaṭṭitayuttaṭṭhānesu tathāvidhova hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
诸比丘,当悦意的业果现前时,以长为好的肢体,便成就为长;以短为好的肢体,便成就为短;以粗壮为好的肢体,便成就为粗壮;以纤细为好的肢体,便成就为纤细;以圆润为好的肢体,便成就为圆润。显示巴利原文
‘‘Manāpiye ca kho, bhikkhave, kammavipāke paccupaṭṭhite yehi aṅgehi dīghehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni dīghāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi rassehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni rassāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi thūlehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni thūlāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi kisehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni kisāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi vaṭṭehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni vaṭṭāni saṇṭhahantī’’ti.
如此,以种种心、以福德心所构筑,以十波罗蜜所庄严的如来之身,世间一切工匠或具神通者,皆不能模仿其相好。显示巴利原文
Iti nānācittena puññacittena cittito dasahi pāramīhi sajjito tathāgatassa attabhāvo, tassa loke sabbasippino vā iddhimanto vā paṭirūpakampi kātuṃ na sakkonti.
“肩间饱满”:两肩胛骨之间称为“肩间”,如来此部位充实圆满,故称“肩间饱满”。其他人此处凹陷,两肩胛骨各自分明。而如来从腰部起,肌肉层向上隆起,覆盖背部,宛如竖立的金板,一直延展至肩膀。显示巴利原文
Citantaraṃsoti antaraṃsaṃ vuccati dvinnaṃ koṭṭānamantaraṃ, taṃ citaṃ paripuṇṇamassāti citantaraṃso. Aññesañhi taṃ ṭhānaṃ ninnaṃ hoti, dve piṭṭhikoṭṭā pāṭiyekkaṃ paññāyanti. Tathāgatassa pana kaṭito paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ yāva khandhā uggamma samussitasuvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viya piṭṭhiṃ chādetvā patiṭṭhitaṃ.
“如尼拘律树之圆”:意为如尼拘律树般圆整。比如一棵尼拘律树,无论高五十肘或一百肘,树干与枝条都匀称,竖量与横量同等;同样,如来身量与臂展也等量齐观。其他人或身长而臂短,或臂长而身短,并不均等,这就是其含义。因此说“如其身”等等。其中,“如其身”即指与其身量相应。显示巴利原文
Nigrodhaparimaṇḍaloti nigrodho viya parimaṇḍalo. Yathā paṇṇāsahatthatāya vā satahatthatāya vā samakkhandhasākho nigrodho dīghatopi vitthāratopi ekappamāṇova hoti, evaṃ kāyatopi byāmatopi ekappamāṇo. Yathā aññesaṃ kāyo vā dīgho hoti byāmo vā, na evaṃ visamappamāṇoti attho. Teneva ‘‘yāvatakvassa kāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yāvatako assāti yāvatakvassa.
“肩头圆满”:意为圆整的肩头。有些人颈长如鹤,或弯曲如鹭,或粗大如猪,说话时青筋显露,声音微弱;如来则不然。如来的肩头犹如善加旋就的金门闩般圆整,说话时青筋不现,音声宏大,如云中雷鸣。显示巴利原文
Samavaṭṭakkhandhoti samavaṭṭitakkhandho. Yathā eke koñcā viya bakā viya varāhā viya ca dīghagalā vaṅkagalā puthulagalā ca honti, kathanakāle sirājālaṃ paññāyati, mando saro nikkhamati, na evaṃ tassa. Tathāgatassa pana suvaṭṭitasuvaṇṇāliṅgasadiso khandho hoti, kathanakāle sirājālaṃ na paññāyati, meghassa viya gajjato saro mahā hoti.
“味端顶尖”:在此,“尝味者”名为“味端”,是对味觉导管的称呼;这些导管极为顶尖,故称“味端顶尖”。如来的七千条味觉导管皆向上伸展,汇于颈部。即使仅有芝麻大小的食物置于舌尖,也能遍润全身。因此,当如来行大精进、仅依一粒米或一碗豆粥维生时,身体亦得滋养。他人无此功能,养料不能遍满全身,故大多多病。此相即由名为“少病”的异熟果所成就。显示巴利原文
Rasaggasaggīti ettha rasaṃ gasantīti rasaggasā , rasaharaṇīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tā aggā assāti rasaggasaggī. Tathāgatassa hi satta rasaharaṇisahassāni uddhaggāni hutvā gīvāyameva paṭimukkāni. Tilaphalamattopi āhāro jivhagge ṭhapito sabbaṃ kāyaṃ anupharati, teneva mahāpadhānaṃ padahantassa ekataṇḍulādīhipi kāḷāyayūsapasatenāpi kāyassa yāpanaṃ ahosi. Aññesaṃ pana tathā abhāvā na sakalakāyaṃ ojā pharati, tena te bahvābādhā honti. Idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ appābādhatāsaṅkhātassa nissandaphalassa vasena pākaṭaṃ hoti.
“狮子颏”:指犹如狮子的颏。于狮子而言,下颏是圆满的,上颏则不圆满;而如来的两颏皆如下颏一般圆满,犹如十五日的月亮。显示巴利原文
Sīhasseva hanu assāti sīhahanu. Tattha sīhassa heṭṭhimahanumeva paripuṇṇaṃ hoti, na uparimaṃ. Tathāgatassa pana sīhassa heṭṭhimaṃ viya dvepi paripuṇṇāni dvādasiyaṃ pakkhassa candasadisāni honti.
“四十齿”等:上颚安有二十齿,下颚安有二十齿,合共四十齿,故称“四十齿”。他人纵使齿全,亦不过三十二齿,而如来则有四十齿。显示巴利原文
Cattālīsadantotiādīsu uparimahanuke patiṭṭhitā vīsati, heṭṭhime vīsatīti cattālīsa dantā assāti cattālīsadanto. Aññesañhi paripuṇṇadantānampi dvattiṃsa dantā honti, tathāgatassa cattālīsaṃ.
他人的牙齿有高有低,参差不齐;而如来的牙齿则像被锯开的贝壳片一样平整。显示巴利原文
Aññesañca keci dantā uccā keci nīcāti visamā honti, tathāgatassa pana ayapaṭṭachinnasaṅkhapaṭalaṃ viya samā.
他人的牙齿如同鳄鱼齿那般稀疏,以鱼肉等为食时,牙缝便充满残渣。而如来的牙齿,犹如金蔓中竖起的金刚行列,密致无隙,宛如用画笔划出的界线般分明。显示巴利原文
Aññesaṃ kumbhīlānaṃ viya dantā viraḷā honti, macchamaṃsādīni khādantānaṃ dantantaraṃ pūrati. Tathāgatassa pana kanakalatāya samussāpitavajirapanti viya aviraḷā tulikāya dassitaparicchedā viya dantā honti.
「齿极白净」:他人多有腐齿,因而有些牙齿发黑、变色。而如来齿极白净,其光明甚至超过晨星,故称「齿极白净」。显示巴利原文
Susukkadāṭhoti aññesañca pūtidantā uṭṭhahanti, tena kāci dāṭhā kāḷāpi vivaṇṇāpi honti. Tathāgato susukkadāṭho osadhitārakampi atikkamma virocamānāya pabhāya samannāgatadāṭho, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘susukkadāṭho’’ti.
广长舌:其他人的舌头,有粗厚的、细薄的、短小的、僵硬的,也有不规则的。而如来的舌头则柔软、修长、宽广,且色泽具足。为了消除前来寻求此相者心中的疑惑,他以柔软之性,将舌头卷起,犹如卷起一根粗针,而能触及两侧鼻孔;以修长之性,能触及两侧耳孔;以宽广之性,则覆盖整个发际乃至全部额头。如此,示现舌头柔软、修长、宽广之相,以除众人疑惑。对于具足此三相的舌头,故称为“广长舌”。显示巴利原文
Pahūtajivhoti aññesaṃ jivhā thūlāpi hoti kisāpi rassāpi thaddhāpi visamāpi, tathāgatassa pana mudu dīghā puthulā vaṇṇasampannā hoti. So taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ pariyesituṃ āgatānaṃ kaṅkhāvinodanatthaṃ mudukattā taṃ jivhaṃ kathinasūciṃ viya vaṭṭetvā ubho nāsikasotāni parāmasati, dīghattā ubho kaṇṇasotāni parāmasati, puthulattā kesantapariyosānaṃ kevalampi nalāṭaṃ paṭicchādeti. Evaṃ tassā mududīghaputhulabhāvaṃ pakāsento kaṅkhaṃ vinodeti. Evaṃ tilakkhaṇasampannaṃ jivhaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pahūtajivho’’ti vuttaṃ.
梵音:其他人的声音,有断裂的、破散的,也有如乌鸦叫一般的。而如来则具足与大梵天相似的声音。大梵天的声音因为不被胆汁、痰等所障碍,所以清净。如来所造之业净化了(发声的)根门,由于根门清净,他的声音从脐部开始生起,清净而具足八支,由此发出。“如迦陵频伽鸟般发声”,意思是如同处在求偶期的迦陵频伽鸟那般,发出美妙音声。显示巴利原文
Brahmassaroti aññe chinnassarāpi bhinnassarāpi kākassarāpi honti, tathāgato pana mahābrahmuno sarasadisena sarena samannāgato. Mahābrahmuno hi pittasemhehi apalibuddhattā saro visuddho hoti. Tathāgatenāpi katakammaṃ vatthuṃ sodheti, vatthussa suddhattā nābhito paṭṭhāya samuṭṭhahanto saro visuddho aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatova samuṭṭhāti. Karaviko viya bhaṇatīti karavikabhāṇī, mattakaravikarutamañjughosoti attho.
在此,关于迦陵频伽音声的美妙,有这样的说明:据说,迦陵频伽鸟用嘴喙啄食甘甜的熟芒果,饮其流出的汁液,然后用翅膀打拍子鸣叫。这时,四足众生等都像喝醉了一样开始嬉戏。正在觅食的四足众生也把嘴里的草吐掉,来听这个声音;猛兽正在追逐小动物时,抬起的脚都忘了放下来;被追逐的动物也不顾死亡的恐惧而站着;空中飞行的鸟也展开翅膀停住;水里的鱼也竖起耳膜倾听这个声音。迦陵频伽的音声就是如此美妙。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ karavikarutassa mañjutāya – karavikasakuṇe kira madhurarasaṃ ambapakkaṃ mukhatuṇḍakena paharitvā paggharitaṃ rasaṃ sāyitvā pakkhena tālaṃ datvā vikūjamāne catuppadādīni mattāni viya laḷituṃ ārabhanti. Gocarappasutāpi catuppadā mukhagatānipi tiṇāni chaḍḍetvā taṃ saddaṃ suṇanti, vāḷamigā khuddakamige anubandhamānā ukkhittapādaṃ anukkhipitvāva tiṭṭhanti, anubaddhamigāpi maraṇabhayaṃ hitvāpi tiṭṭhanti, ākāse pakkhandapakkhinopi pakkhe pasāretvā tiṭṭhanti, udake macchāpi kaṇṇapaṭalaṃ apphoṭentā taṃ saddaṃ suṇamānāva tiṭṭhanti. Evaṃ mañjurutā karavikā.
阿桑迪弥塔是法阿育王的王妃,她曾问僧众:“尊者!可有谁的声音与佛陀的声音相似?”僧众答:“迦陵频伽鸟。”“尊者!那鸟在何处?”“在雪山。”她便禀告国王:“大王!我想见迦陵频伽鸟。”国王说:“让迦陵频伽鸟坐在这金笼中送来。”于是放飞一只金笼。金笼飞至一只迦陵频伽鸟前,鸟心想:“此笼乃奉王命而来,我不可不去。”便坐入其中。笼子飞回,停在国王面前。众人无法令迦陵频伽鸟发出鸣声。国王便问:“此鸟如何鸣叫?”答:“大王,见到同类时。”于是国王命人用镜子围绕它。鸟见到自己的影像,以为“同类来了”,便振翅拍击,发出如吹奏宝螺般美妙的音声。一时,满城之人皆如饮醉般嬉戏。阿桑迪弥塔心想:“这畜生尚有如此甜美的音声,那已证得遍知智这一吉祥瑞相的世尊,其音声又将是何等样貌!”她生起欢喜,并持续浸润于此欢喜中,仅以七步行的过程,便证得入流果。迦陵频伽的音声如此甜美,而如来的音声更胜过它百倍、千倍。然而世间没有其他音声比迦陵频伽的音声更为甜美。显示巴利原文
Asandhimittāpi dhammāsokassa devī – ‘‘atthi nu kho, bhante, buddhasaddena sadiso kassaci saddo’’ti saṅghaṃ pucchi. Atthi karavikasakuṇassāti. Kuhiṃ, bhante, sakuṇāti? Himavanteti. Sā rājānaṃ āha, – ‘‘deva, karavikasakuṇaṃ daṭṭhukāmā’’ti. Rājā ‘‘imasmiṃ pañjare nisīditvā karaviko āgacchatū’’ti suvaṇṇapañjaraṃ vissajjesi. Pañjaro gantvā ekassa karavikassa purato aṭṭhāsi. So ‘‘rājāṇāya āgato pañjaro, na sakkā agantu’’nti tattha nisīdi. Pañjaro āgantvā rañño puratova aṭṭhāsi. Karavikaṃ saddaṃ kārāpetuṃ na sakkonti. Atha rājā ‘‘kathaṃ bhaṇe ime saddaṃ karontī’’ti āha? Ñātake disvā devāti. Atha naṃ rājā ādāsehi parikkhipāpesi. So attanova chāyaṃ disvā ‘‘ñātakā me āgatā’’ti maññamāno pakkhena tāḷaṃ datvā mañjussarena maṇivaṃsaṃ dhamamāno viya viravi. Sakalanagare manussā mattā viya laḷiṃsu. Asandhimittā cintesi – ‘‘imassa tāva tiracchānassa evaṃ madhuro saddo, kīdiso nu kho sabbaññutaññāṇasirippattassa bhagavato ahosī’’ti pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ pītiṃ avijahitvā sattahi jaṅghasatehi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ madhuro karavikasaddo. Tato satabhāgena sahassabhāgena ca madhurataro tathāgatassa saddo, loke pana karavikato aññassa madhurarassa abhāvato ‘‘karavikabhāṇī’’ti vuttaṃ.
「眼色绀青」并非指整个眼珠皆为青色,而是在当现青色的部位,其眼具有犹如乌摩花般极纯净的青色;在当现黄色的部位,具有犹如迦尼迦罗花般的黄色;在当现红色的部位,具有犹如般度吉瓦迦花般的红色;在当现白色的部位,具有犹如晨星般的白色;在当现黑色的部位,具有犹如黑石般的黑色。这双眼睛看去,宛如金殿中开启的宝式狮窗一般。显示巴利原文
Abhinīlanettoti na sakalanīlanettova, nīlayuttaṭṭhāne panassa umāpupphasadisena ativisuddhena nīlavaṇṇena samannāgatāni akkhīni honti. Pītayuttaṭṭhāne kaṇikārapupphasadisena pītavaṇṇena, lohitayuttaṭṭhāne bandhujīvakapupphasadisena lohitavaṇṇena, setayuttaṭṭhāne osadhitārakasadisena setavaṇṇena, kāḷayuttaṭṭhāne addāriṭṭhakasadisena kāḷavaṇṇena samannāgatāni suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjarasadisāni khāyanti.
「牛睫」中,“睫”乃指整个眼窠。小牛的眼窠厚实多汁,红色小牛的眼窠则极为明净。意思是说,如来的眼窠如同刚刚出生片刻的红犊眼窠那样明净。其他人的眼窠皆不圆满,或如象眼,或如鼠眼,或如乌鸦眼,凸出而深陷。然而如来的眼睛,却像清洗擦拭后安放的宝珠,柔软润滑,密生着深蓝色的细睫毛,芊绵丛立。显示巴利原文
Gopakhumoti ettha pakhumanti sakalaṃ cakkhubhaṇḍaṃ adhippetaṃ. Taṃ kāḷavacchakassa bahaladhātukaṃ hoti, rattavacchakassa vippasannaṃ, taṃmuhuttajātarattavacchasadisacakkhubhaṇḍoti attho. Aññesañhi akkhibhaṇḍā aparipuṇṇā honti, hatthimūsikakākādīnaṃ akkhisadisehi viniggatehi gambhīrehipi akkhīhi samannāgatā honti. Tathāgatassa pana dhovitvā majjitvā ṭhapitamaṇiguḷikā viya mudusiniddhanīlasukhumapakhumācitāni akkhīni.
“白毫相”(uṇṇā)即指那根白毫毛,生于眉间——两眉正中、鼻根之上。长出后,便安处于额头的中央。说它“白色”,是极为清净的色泽,如同晨星的光色。“柔软”,犹如沉淀于生酥之中、经过上百次梳理的棉絮。“绵软”,如同木棉絮般绵软,这是就其白色所作的比喻。若捏住末端向外拉,可牵至半臂之长;松手时,它便向右旋绕,向上竖起,安然安住。它就像安放在金板正中的银珠,如同从金罐倾出的乳汁,又如朝霞映照路面的那颗晨星,放射出无比悦意的祥瑞光芒。显示巴利原文
Uṇṇāti uṇṇalomaṃ. Bhamukantareti dvinnaṃ bhamukānaṃ vemajjhe nāsikamatthakeyeva jātā. Uggantvā pana nalāṭamajjhajātā. Odātāti parisuddhā osadhitārakavaṇṇā. Mudūti sappimaṇḍe osādetvā ṭhapitasatavāravihatakappāsapaṭalasadisā. Tūlasannibhāti simbalitūlalatātūlasamānā, ayamassā odātatāya upamā. Sā panesā koṭiyaṃ gahetvā ākaḍḍhiyamānā upaḍḍhabāhuppamāṇā hoti, vissaṭṭhā dakkhiṇāvaṭṭavasena āvaṭṭitvā uddhaggā hutvā santiṭṭhati, suvaṇṇaphalakamajjhe ṭhapitarajatapupphuḷakā viya suvaṇṇaghaṭato nikkhamamānā khīradhārā viya aruṇappabhārañjite gamanatale osadhitārakā viya ca atimanoharāya siriyā virocati.
“顶髻相”(uṇhīsasīso)这一名称,是依据两种含义而说:一是额头的圆满,二是整个头部的圆满。如来的额上,有一层肉片从右耳廓处隆起,覆盖并逐渐充满整个额头,一直延展至左耳廓,犹如国王缠束的顶巾一般闪耀。据说,正是由于国王们知道最后有身的菩萨都具足此相,才制作了顶巾,这是第一种意义。其他人的头都不圆满:有的像猴头,有的像果头,有的像骨突头,有的像葫芦头,有的像岩壁窝头。而如来的头,则如同用锥尖细细旋削而成,极其圆整,又像水泡一般。依前一种解释,就像用顶巾缠裹的头,因此称为‘顶髻相’;依后一种解释,就像顶巾那样处处圆整的头,因此称为‘顶髻相’。显示巴利原文
Uṇhīsasīsoti idaṃ paripuṇṇanalāṭatañceva paripuṇṇasīsatañcāti dve atthavase paṭicca vuttaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi dakkhiṇakaṇṇacūḷikato paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ uṭṭhahitvā sakalaṃ nalāṭaṃ chādayamānaṃ pūrayamānaṃ gantvā vāmakaṇṇacūḷikāya patiṭṭhitaṃ, rañño baddhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Pacchimabhavikabodhisattānaṃ kira imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ viditvā rājūnaṃ uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ akaṃsu, ayaṃ tāva eko attho. Aññe pana janā aparipuṇṇasīsā honti, keci kappasīsā, keci phalasīsā, keci aṭṭhisīsā, keci tumbasīsā, keci pabbhārasīsā. Tathāgatassa pana āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaṃ viya suparipuṇṇaṃ udakapupphuḷasadisaṃ sīsaṃ hoti. Tattha purimanayena uṇhīsaveṭhitasīso viyāti uṇhīsasīso. Dutiyanayena uṇhīsaṃ viya sabbattha parimaṇḍalasīsoti uṇhīsasīso.
再者,对于这些大人相,若能在每一相中都阐明四个部分:所造之业、与业相似的特征、相本身、相的功德,才算是善巧解说。因此,世尊在《相经》(《长部》3.200–202)中所开示的这些业等内容,应当依此展示解说。若凭经文本身尚无法确定,则应依《善喜光明》——《长部注》彼经的注释所示的方法来把握。显示巴利原文
Imāni pana mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni kammaṃ kammasarikkhakaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ lakkhaṇānisaṃsanti ime cattāro koṭṭhāse ekekasmiṃ lakkhaṇe dassetvā kathitāni sukathitāni honti. Tasmā bhagavatā lakkhaṇasutte (dī. ni. 3.200-202) vuttāni imāni kammādīni dassetvā kathetabbāni . Suttavasena vinicchituṃ asakkontena sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya tasseva suttassa vaṇṇanāya vuttanayena gahetabbāni.
经中说“尊者,那位尊贵的乔达摩具足这些三十二大人相”,这里的“尊者”即老师。意思是:老师啊,那位尊贵的乔达摩具足这三十二大人相,如同天城中高高耸立、众宝装饰的金拱门;如同高达一百由旬、满树繁花的波利质多罗树;如同山岩间开满花朵的娑罗树;又如群星点缀的夜空。他以自身威德的光辉,仿佛令世间生起光明而行。说明了这层意义之后,为宣说他的威仪行持,经中便接着说“而他正在前行时”等等。显示巴利原文
Imehi kho, bho, so bhavaṃ gotamoti, bho ācariya, imehi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi so bhavaṃ gotamo samannāgato devanagare samussitaratanavicittaṃ suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya yojanasatubbedho sabbapāliphullo pāricchattako viya selantaramhi supupphitasālarukkho viya tārāgaṇapaṭimaṇḍitagaganatalamiva ca attano sirivibhavena lokaṃ ālokaṃ kurumāno viya caratīti imatthampi dīpetvā kiriyācāraṃ ācikkhituṃ gacchanto kho panātiādimāha.
387 “以右足(先行)”:因为一切诸佛,无论是站立、安坐还是躺卧,凡要起行之时,永远是右脚先动。据说这确实是一种恒常不断的示现。“不将脚抬得过远”:他抬起右脚时,心里想的是“我不把这只脚放得过远”。因为如果送得太远,右脚送出时,左脚就会被拖着向前;右脚本身也无法迈远,只能落在很近的地方,这样一来步距就会变得断裂、不均匀。然而,当右脚恰好适度地抬起时,左脚也就恰好适度地抬起;恰好适度地抬起之后,落脚时也恰好适度地落下。应当知道,就这样,如来的右脚受左脚节制,左脚也受右脚节制。显示巴利原文
387.Dakkhiṇenāti buddhānañhi ṭhatvā vā nisīditvā vā nipajjitvā vā gamanaṃ abhinīharantānaṃ dakkhiṇapādova purato hoti. Satatapāṭihāriyaṃ kiretaṃ. Nātidūrepādaṃ uddharatīti taṃ dakkhiṇapādaṃ na atidūre ṭhapessāmīti uddharati. Atidūrañhi abhihariyamāne dakkhiṇapādena vāmapādo ākaḍḍhiyamāno gaccheyya, dakkhiṇapādopi dūraṃ gantuṃ na sakkuṇeyya, āsanneyeva patiṭṭhaheyya, evaṃ sati padavicchedo nāma hoti. Dakkhiṇapāde pana pamāṇeneva uddhate vāmapādopi pamāṇeneva uddhariyati, pamāṇena uddhato patiṭṭhahantopi pamāṇeyeva patiṭṭhāti. Evamanena tathāgatassa dakkhiṇapādakiccaṃ vāmapādena niyamitaṃ, vāmapādakiccaṃ dakkhiṇapādena niyamitanti veditabbaṃ.
“不疾”:他走路不会过快,不像比丘为去日间住处或乞食那样急赶。“不徐”:也不会慢到令后面来的人完全没有空间靠近。“不使膝与膝相触”:膝与膝不会相碰。“不抬高大腿”:不会像在深水中行走那样高抬大腿。“不拖后脚”:不会像用铁钩杖截取树枝那样把脚向后拖。“不僵直脚”:不会像在绑好或未绑好的地方用力顿脚那样,把脚绷得僵硬。“不弯曲摇摆脚”:不会像摆弄机关木偶那样,将脚左摇右晃。“下躯”:只有下半身转动,上半身如同安置在船上的金像一般凝然不动。人们从远处看时,甚至分不清佛是站着还是在行走。“不以身体力量”:他行走时不是靠甩动手臂、汗水淋漓那样的体力来走。“以全体身”:他回视之时,如同《罗睺罗教诫经》中所说的大象回望那样,不转动脖颈,而是转动整个身体来回视。显示巴利原文
Nātisīghanti divā vihārabhattatthāya gacchanto bhikkhu viya na atisīghaṃ gacchati. Nātisaṇikanti yathā pacchato āgacchanto okāsaṃ na labhati, evaṃ na atisaṇikaṃ gacchati. Adduvena adduvanti jaṇṇukena jaṇṇukaṃ, nasatthiṃ unnāmetīti gambhīre udake gacchanto viya na ūruṃ unnāmeti. Na onāmetīti rukkhasākhāchedanadaṇḍaṅkusapādo viya na pacchato osakkāpeti. Na sannāmetīti obaddhānābaddhaṭṭhānehi pādaṃ koṭṭento viya na thaddhaṃ karoti. Navināmetīti yantarūpakaṃ kīḷāpento viya na ito cito ca cāleti. Adharakāyovāti heṭṭhimakāyova iñjati, uparimakāyo nāvāya ṭhapitasuvaṇṇapaṭimā viya niccalo hoti. Dūre ṭhatvā olokento hi buddhānaṃ ṭhitabhāvaṃ vā gamanabhāvaṃ vā na jānāti . Kāyabalenāti bāhā khipanto sarīrato sedehi muccantehi na kāyabalena gacchati. Sabbakāyenevāti gīvaṃ aparivattetvā rāhulovāde vuttanāgāpalokitavaseneva apaloketi.
于“不向上”等句中:他不像数星星那样抬头仰望,不像寻找丢失的零星钱币那般低头逼视,也不像观看大象、马匹等那样左顾右盼地行走。“一轭量”:他将目光置于前方约九拃远处行走,即名“视一轭量”。世尊犹如安于轭下的善调良马,唯观此范围而行。所谓“由此更向上看”,不应误解为他不见一轭量外之物;墙壁、门扇、树丛、蔓草皆不能为障,以其无碍智故,数千轮围世界亦如一座庭院。“入民居”:在《大善生优陀夷经》中,“民居”是从城门门槛算起;而此处应从屋宅门槛算起。“不以身……”等句,是为了显示世尊始终以平常威仪入户。纵使进入穷人的低矮小屋,或屋顶自然升高,或大地自然沉降,世尊依然以常行步态行走。“不过远”:若转身过远,则需退后一兩步方能就坐。“不过近”:若转身过近,则需向前一兩步方能就坐。因此,世尊在转身站立之处,即于不必前后移步即可坐下的位置转身。显示巴利原文
Na uddhantiādīsu nakkhattāni gaṇento viya na uddhaṃ ulloketi, naṭṭhaṃ kākaṇikaṃ vā māsakaṃ vā pariyesanto viya na adho oloketi, na hatthiassādayo passanto viya ito cito ca vipekkhamāno gacchati. Yugamattanti navavidatthimatte cakkhūni ṭhapetvā gacchanto yugamattaṃ pekkhati nāma, bhagavāpi yuge yutto sudantaājānīyo viya ettakaṃ passanto gacchati. Tato cassa uttarīti yugamattato paraṃ na passatīti na vattabbo. Na hi kuṭṭaṃ vā kavāṭaṃ vā gaccho vā latā vā āvarituṃ sakkoti, atha khvassa anāvaraṇañāṇassa anekāni cakkavāḷasahassāni ekaṅgaṇāneva honti. Antaragharanti heṭṭhā mahāsakuludāyisutte indakhīlato paṭṭhāya antaragharaṃ, idha gharaummārato paṭṭhāya veditabbaṃ. Nakāyantiādi pakatiiriyapatheneva pavisatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Daliddamanussānaṃ nīcagharakaṃ pavisantepi hi tathāgate chadanaṃ vā uggacchati, pathavī vā ogacchati, bhagavā pana pakatigamaneneva gacchati. Nātidūreti atidūre parivattantena hi ekaṃ dve padavāre piṭṭhibhāgena gantvā nisīditabbaṃ hoti. Nāccāsanneti accāsanne parivattantena ekaṃ dve padavāre purato gantvā nisīditabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā yasmiṃ padavāre ṭhitena purato vā pacchato vā agantvā nisīditabbaṃ hoti, tattha parivattati.
“以手”:他不像患腰风病者那样用手撑着座位坐下。“投身于座”:若有人活动之后,嬉戏般站着猛然坐下;或以座席近边为支点坐下后,蹭移至远边;或以远边为支点坐下后,同样蹭移至近边——这些皆名“把身体抛向座位”。然而世尊并不如此,他如同在座位中央悬垂安放,如置棉絮般轻柔坐下。“手之不安分”:指在钵口缘安放水滴、用蝇拂分割叶片等用手做出的不调伏行为。“脚之不安分”:指用脚蹭地等用脚做出的不调伏行为。显示巴利原文
Pāṇināti kaṭivātābādhiko viya na āsanaṃ hatthehi gahetvā nisīdati. Pakkhipatīti yo kiñci kammaṃ katvā kīḷanto ṭhitakova patati, yopi orimaṃ aṅgaṃ nissāya nisinno ghaṃsanto yāva pārimaṅgā gacchati, pārimaṅgaṃ vā nissāya nisinno tatheva yāva orimaṅgā āgacchati, sabbo so āsane kāyaṃ pakkhipati nāma. Bhagavā pana evaṃ akatvā āsanassa majjhe olambakaṃ dhārento viya tūlapicuṃ ṭhapento viya saṇikaṃ nisīdati. Hatthakukkuccanti pattamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ udakabinduṭhapanaṃ makkhikabījaniyā paṇṇacchedanaphālanādi hatthena asaṃyatakaraṇaṃ. Pādakukkuccanti pādena bhūmighaṃsanādi asaṃyatakaraṇaṃ.
“不畏惧”:不恐惧。“不沉没”:不下陷。“不摇动”:不晃荡。“不困扰”:不因恐惧之困扰或贪爱之困扰而困扰。有些人为了说法等事而来,见众人礼敬后,会因恐惧之困扰而思虑:“我能把握他们的心而说法吗?能解答提问吗?能作斋后随喜吗?”另有些人则因贪爱之困扰而想:“会有合我口味的粥送来吗?有可口的点心吗?”如来远离此二种困扰,故说“不困扰”。“心向远离”:心转向寂静涅槃。又或读作“vivekavatto”,意为具足远离行。所谓“远离行”,即比丘食毕之后,于日间住处,依止观修习根本业处,结跏趺座而坐。如是安坐之人,其威仪寂静调柔。显示巴利原文
Na chambhatīti na bhāyati. Na kampatīti na osīdati. Na vedhatīti na calati. Naparitassatīti bhayaparitassanāyapi taṇhāparitassanāyapi na paritassati. Ekacco hi dhammakathādīnaṃ atthāya āgantvā manussesu vanditvā ṭhitesu ‘‘sakkhissāmi nu kho tesaṃ cittaṃ gaṇhanto dhammaṃ vā kathetuṃ, pañhaṃ vā pucchito vissajjetuṃ, bhattānumodanaṃ vā kātu’’nti bhayaparitassanāya paritassati. Ekacco ‘‘manāpā nu kho me yāgu āgacchissati, manāpaṃ antarakhajjaka’’nti vā taṇhāparitassanāya paritassati. Tadubhayampi tassa natthīti na paritassati. Vivekāvaṭṭoti viveke nibbāne āvaṭṭamānaso hutvā. Vivekavattotipi pāṭho, vivekavattayutto hutvāti attho. Vivekavattaṃ nāma katabhattakiccassa bhikkhuno divāvihāre samathavipassanāvasena mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdanaṃ. Evaṃ nisinnassa hi iriyāpatho upasanto hoti.
「不抬钵」等:有人像是要把水倒在钵口边缘似的,把钵高高抬起;有人则像把钵放在脚背上似的,将钵放得过低;有人用力紧握钵,仿佛要将它固定住;有人让钵左右晃动。比丘不作这些行持,而是用双手持钵,稍作倾斜而受水,这就是此处的含义。「不翻转」:意指不会将钵翻转过来,先洗背面。「不过远」:倒水时,不会使水落在离座过远之处。「不过近」:不会直接倒在脚边。「如法洒净」:即泼洒时,不会溅湿接水之人。显示巴利原文
Na pattaṃ unnāmetītiādīsu ekacco pattamukhavaṭṭiyā udakadānaṃ āharanto viya pattaṃ unnāmeti, eko pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapento viya onāmeti, eko baddhaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, eko ito cito ca phandāpeti, evaṃ akatvā ubhohi hatthehi gahetvā īsakaṃ nāmetvā udakaṃ paṭiggaṇhātīti attho. Na samparivattakanti parivattetvā paṭhamameva pattapiṭṭhiṃ na dhovati. Nātidūreti yathā nisinnāsanato dūre patati, na evaṃ chaḍḍeti. Nāccāsanneti pādamūleyeva na chaḍḍeti. Vicchaḍḍayamānoti vikiranto, yathā paṭiggāhako temati, na evaṃ chaḍḍeti.
「不太少」:不像某一类恶欲而装作少欲的人那样,只取抓一把的量。「过多」:指超过了维持生命所需的份量。「依佐料之量」:所谓佐料之量,是指饭菜的四分之一。有人见饭可口便多取饭,有人见佐料可口便多取佐料。然而导师不会如此取用。「不以佐料过量」:若有人放着不喜的佐料只吃饭,或放着饭只吃佐料,便称作“以佐料过量”。导师是交替取用,令饭与佐料同时用尽。「二三次」:对如来而言,以广长舌送近牙齿的食物,仅经牙齿触碰两三次,便如同精细研磨的涂面香粉一般细滑,故有此说。「口中不留余粒」:犹如水珠滑落莲叶,食物旋即翻转,顺喉而下,因此口中不残留任何食物。「觉知味」而不染:对于甘、苦、涩等一切味,他都清楚觉知。于诸佛而言,纵是饮用之水,也仿佛融入了天界美味,因此他们对一切食物的味道都了然分明,心中却毫无对味的贪染。显示巴利原文
Nātithokanti yathā ekacco pāpiccho appicchataṃ dassento muṭṭhimattameva gaṇhāti, na evaṃ. Atibahunti yāpanamattato atirekaṃ. Byañjanamattāyāti byañjanassa mattā nāma odanato catuttho bhāgo. Ekacco hi bhatte manāpe bhattaṃ bahuṃ gaṇhāti, byañjane manāpe byañjanaṃ bahuṃ. Satthā pana tathā na gaṇhāti. Na ca byañjanenāti amanāpañhi byañjanaṃ ṭhapetvā bhattameva bhuñjanto, bhattaṃ vā ṭhapetvā byañjanameva khādanto byañjanena ālopaṃ atināmeti nāma. Satthā ekantarikaṃ byañjanaṃ gaṇhāti, bhattampi byañjanampi ekatova niṭṭhanti. Dvattikkhattunti tathāgatassa hi puthujivhāya dantānaṃ upanītabhojanaṃ dvattikkhattuṃ dantehi phuṭṭhamattameva saṇhakaraṇīyapiṭṭhavilepanaṃ viya hoti, tasmā evamāha. Na mukhe avasiṭṭhāti pokkharapatte patitaudakabindu viya vinivattitvā paragalameva yāti, tasmā avasiṭṭhā na hoti. Rasapaṭisaṃvedīti madhuratittakadukādirasaṃ jānāti. Buddhānañhi antamaso pānīyepi dibbojā pakkhittāva hoti, tena nesaṃ sabbattheva raso pākaṭo hoti, rasagedho pana natthi.
「具足八支」:即具足从“不为嬉戏”等所说的八种行相。其详细抉择见于《清净道论》,此是依《一切漏经》而说。「双手洗净后」:导师是如何做的呢?他先洗净持钵之处,然后握住钵,将具足细密网纹的手伸入,来回轻摩两遍。仅此而已,水就像落在莲叶上一般,旋即流走。「非不介意」:不像有些人将钵置于钵架后,不擦干钵中余水,对灰尘飘落漠不关心。「非过度长时守护」:也不像某些人设立过度的守护,譬如饭毕即将钵中水渍擦干,把钵收入衣内,用腹部压住来持守。世尊不如此行。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘neva davāyā’’ti vuttehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Visuddhimagge panassa vinicchayo āgatoti sabbāsavasutte vuttametaṃ. Hatthesu dhotesūti satthā kiṃ karoti? Paṭhamaṃ pattassa gahaṇaṭṭhānaṃ dhovati. Tattha pattaṃ gahetvā sukhumajālahatthaṃ pesetvā dve vāre sañcāreti. Ettāvatā pokkharapatte patitaudakaṃ viya vinivattitvā gacchati. Na ca anatthikoti yathā ekacco pattaṃ ādhārake ṭhapetvā patte udakaṃ na puñchati, raje patante ajjhupekkhati, na evaṃ karoti. Na ca ativelānurakkhīti yathā ekacco pamāṇātikkantaṃ ārakkhaṃ ṭhapeti, bhuñjitvā vā patte udakaṃ puñchitvā cīvarabhogantaraṃ pavesetvā pattaṃ udarena akkamitvā gaṇhāti, na evaṃ karoti.
“不拖延随喜”:若有人刚用完饭,见小孩们因要吃饭而哭闹、众人还饿着肚子时,便立即开始作随喜,那么有些人会放下手头一切赶来,有些人却尚未到达,这就拖延了时间。又或,当大众为听随喜前来礼敬坐下后,不作随喜,反而先进行个别交谈,如:“帝思怎么样?弗沙怎么样?善意怎么样?帝瑟怎么样?弗塞怎么样?苏曼内怎么样?你们都身体好吗?庄稼丰收吗?”这也拖延了随喜的时间。然而,世尊了知适当的时机,在众人恳请时才作随喜,因此不拖延。显示巴利原文
Na ca anumodanassāti yo hi bhuttamattova dārakesu bhattatthāya rodantesu chātajjhattesu manussesu bhuñjitvā anāgatesveva anumodanaṃ ārabhati, tato sabbakammāni chaḍḍetvā ekacce āgacchanti, ekacce anāgatāva honti, ayaṃ kālaṃ atināmeti. Yopi manussesu āgantvā anumodanatthāya vanditvā nisinnesu anumodanaṃ akatvāva ‘‘kathaṃ tissa, kathaṃ phussa, kathaṃ sumana, kathaṃ tisse, kathaṃ phusse, kathaṃ sumane, kaccittha arogā, sassaṃ sampanna’’ntiādiṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, ayaṃ anumodanassa kālaṃ atināmeti, manussānaṃ pana okāsaṃ ñatvā āyācitakāle karonto nātināmeti nāma, satthā tathā karoti.
“他不非难那食物”:即不会说“这算什么食物,米没煮熟、太烂了”等非难的话语。“也不期待其他食物”:有人作随喜时心想“我明天或后天要让他们做出食物来”,这便是期待其他食物;又或心想:“等女人们煮好食物时我便作随喜,随喜结束时她们或许会从自己那份中分一点给我”,这样拖延随喜也是期待。佛陀不会这么做。“也不欲求脱身”:因为有人会混入人群后悄悄溜走,让人急忙去追。佛陀不会这样离去,他站在大众中央才离开。“过高”:若有人将衣提至下颚以上披着,那是过高;将衣垂到脚踝以下披着,也是过高;将两端提起露出腹部行走,也是过高;作偏袒而袒露乳房行走,也是过高。佛陀全不如此。显示巴利原文
Na taṃ bhattanti kiṃ bhattaṃ nāmetaṃ uttaṇḍulaṃ atikilinnantiādīni vatvā na garahati. Naaññaṃ bhattanti svātanāya vā punadivasāya vā bhattaṃ uppādessāmīti hi anumodanaṃ karonto aññaṃ bhattaṃ paṭikaṅkhati. Yo vā – ‘‘yāva mātugāmānaṃ bhattaṃ paccati, tāva anumodanaṃ karissāmi, atha me anumodanāvasāne attano pakkabhattatopi thokaṃ dassantī’’ti anumodanaṃ vaḍḍheti, ayampi paṭikaṅkhati nāma. Satthā na evaṃ karoti. Na ca muccitukāmoti ekacco hi paṭisaṃmuñcitvā gacchati, vegena anubandhitabbo hoti. Satthā pana na evaṃ gacchati, parisāya majjhe ṭhitova gacchati. Accukkaṭṭhanti yo hi yāva hanukaṭṭhito ukkhipitvā pārupati, tassa accukkaṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti. Yo yāva gopphakā otāretvāva pārupati, tassa accukkaṭṭhaṃ hoti. Yopi ubhato ukkhipitvā udaraṃ vivaritvā yāti, tassapi accukkaṭṭhaṃ hoti. Yo ekaṃsaṃ katvā thanaṃ vivaritvā yāti, tassapi accukkaṭṭhaṃ. Satthā taṃ sabbaṃ na karoti.
“贴身”:如同别人被汗水湿透的衣服紧贴身体那样,世尊的衣服不会如此。“远离”:不像麻布那样悬离身体。“风”:即使是旋风也不能吹动。“从事装饰脚”:指用砖块摩擦等方式修饰双脚。“洗足”:指用自己的脚搓洗另一只脚。“他不为自我折磨”等话,并非因他有宿住随念智及他心智才这么说,而是见到世尊的威仪持续安稳,依推断而说。“法”:指教法。“不抬举”:不会说“你是大家族出身吗?你是大富豪吗?”等话,不以世俗的方式抬举人。“不轻慢”:不会说“怎么,近事男,你是如何认识来精舍的路的?你是因为害怕才不来吗?比丘们并不会抢夺任何东西,别怕”,或者说“你这样吝啬的生活算什么”,不以世俗的情感轻慢人。显示巴利原文
Allīnanti yathā aññesaṃ sedena tintaṃ allīyati, na evaṃ satthu. Apakaṭṭhanti khalisāṭako viya kāyato muccitvāpi na tiṭṭhati. Vātoti verambhavātopi uṭṭhahitvā cāletuṃ na sakkoti. Pādamaṇḍanānuyoganti iṭṭhakāya ghaṃsanādīhi pādasobhānuyogaṃ. Pakkhāletvāti pādeneva pādaṃ dhovitvā. So neva attabyābādhāyātiādīni na pubbenivāsacetopariyañāṇānaṃ atthitāya vadati, iriyāpathasantataṃ pana disvā anumānena vadati. Dhammanti pariyattidhammaṃ. Na ussādetīti kiṃ mahāraṭṭhika, kiṃ mahākuṭumbikātiādīni vatvā gehassitavasena na ussādeti. Na apasādetīti ‘‘kiṃ, upāsaka, kathaṃ te vihāramaggo ñāto? Kiṃ bhayena nāgacchasi? Na hi bhikkhū kiñci acchinditvā gaṇhanti, mā bhāyī’’ti vā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhaṃ evaṃ macchariyajīvitaṃ nāmā’’ti vā ādīni vatvā gehassitapemena na apasādeti.
「流畅」(Vissaṭṭhoti):指柔和、无滞碍。「可解」(Viññeyyoti):能令人明了、清晰;正因为流畅,所以可解。「悦耳」(Mañjūti):甜美。「动听」(Savanīyoti):令耳欢喜;正因为甜美,所以动听。「凝聚」(Bindūti):紧密聚合。「不散」(Avisārīti):不流散;正因为凝聚,所以不散。「甚深」(Gambhīroti):从深处生起。「回荡」(Ninnādīti):有回荡之声;正因为甚深,所以有回荡。「随受众」(Yathāparisanti):能令以轮围为边际的一切无间大众,无不清晰了知。「向外」(Bahiddhāti):声音不会超出大众之外,哪怕一指节的距离。为何如此?为使这样甜美的音声不致无端消散。因此,世尊的音声只在大众的头顶上传扬。显示巴利原文
Vissaṭṭhoti siniddho apalibuddho. Viññeyyoti viññāpanīyo pākaṭo, vissaṭṭhattāyeva cesa viññeyyo hoti. Mañjūti madhuro. Savanīyoti sotasukho, madhurattāyeva cesa savanīyo hoti. Bindūti sampiṇḍito. Avisārīti avisaṭo, binduttāyeva cesa avisārī hoti. Gambhīroti gambhīrasamuṭṭhito. Ninnādīti ninnādavā, gambhīrattāyeva cesa ninnādī hoti. Yathāparisanti cakkavāḷapariyantampi ekābaddhaparisaṃ viññāpeti. Bahiddhāti aṅgulimattampi parisato bahiddhā na gacchati. Tasmā? So evarūpo madhurassaro akāraṇā mā nassīti. Iti bhagavato ghoso parisāya matthakeneva carati.
「瞻视着」(Avalokayamānāti):将合掌置于头顶,瞻仰着世尊,倒退而行,到看不见世尊的地方时,才礼拜离去。「以不离之性」(Avijahitattāti):有些人听完法语起身后,边走边谈论其他见闻等事,就本性而言,这称为离去;但若有人边走边只赞叹所听闻的法语,这便称为不离。他们正是以这样不离的方式离去。「行走着」(Gacchantanti):犹如被绳子牵引,如同由七宝构成的金色绳索般行走。「我们见屹立」(Addasāma ṭhitanti):像一座矗立的金山那样屹立,我们看见了。「且更超过」(Tato ca bhiyyoti):由于无法详尽称扬他的功德,便将余下的功德略说,如同捆成一束、用线绑住那样放舍,而说道:我所说的功德,远不及未说之多。因为那位尊者的功德无量、不可测度,犹如大地、大海,又如虚空一般周遍弥漫。显示巴利原文
Avalokayamānāti sirasmiṃ añjaliṃ ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ olokentāva paccosakkitvā dassanavijahanaṭṭhāne vanditvā gacchanti. Avijahitattāti yo hi kathaṃ sutvā vuṭṭhito aññaṃ diṭṭhasutādikaṃ kathaṃ kathento gacchati, esa sabhāvena vijahati nāma. Yo pana sutadhammakathāya vaṇṇaṃ kathentova gacchati, ayaṃ na vijahati nāma, evaṃ avijahantabhāvena pakkamanti. Gacchantanti rajjuyantavasena ratanasattubbedhaṃ suvaṇṇagghikaṃ viya gacchantaṃ. Addasāma ṭhitanti samussitakañcanapabbataṃ viya ṭhitaṃ addasāma. Tato ca bhiyyoti vitthāretvā guṇe kathetuṃ asakkonto avasese guṇe saṃkhipitvā kalāpaṃ viya suttakabaddhaṃ viya ca katvā vissajjento evamāha. Ayamettha adhippāyo – mayā kathitaguṇehi akathitāva bahutarā. Mahāpathavimahāsamuddādayo viya hi tassa bhoto anantā appameyyā guṇā ākāsamiva vitthāritāti.
390 「未被察觉」(Appaṭisaṃviditoti):即别人未察觉他的到来。前去拜访出家人时,若在忙着处理袈裟等事务的时候前往,或在只穿着下衣、正涂抹身体的时候前往,便应从那里直接折返,连基本的问候都不会发生。然而,若能预先让人安排适当的机会,清扫日间休息处,披好袈裟,比丘在僻静处坐定,来者见到之后,也会因目见而生起信心,问候便会发生,也才能获得答问或听法的机会。因此,有智慧的人会让人安排机会。他便是他们中的一位,所以当时这样想。「年老、年长」(Jiṇṇo vuḍḍhoti):他为何不说明自己已提升了地位,却这样说呢?因为佛陀们充满悲悯,知道是长老,就会尽快给予机会,所以才这样说。显示巴利原文
390.Appaṭisaṃviditoti aviññātaāgamano. Pabbajite upasaṅkamantena hi cīvaraparikammādisamaye vā ekaṃ nivāsetvā sarīrabhañjanasamaye vā upasaṅkamitvā tatova paṭinivattitabbaṃ hoti, paṭisanthāramattampi na jāyati. Puretaraṃ pana okāse kārite divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā bhikkhu vivitte ṭhāne nisīdati, taṃ āgantvā passantā dassanenapi pasīdanti, paṭisanthāro jāyati, pañhabyākaraṇaṃ vā dhammakathā vā labbhati. Tasmā paṇḍitā okāsaṃ kārenti. So ca nesaṃ aññataro, tenassa etadahosi. Jiṇṇo vuḍḍhoti attano uggatabhāvaṃ akathetvā kasmā evamāha? Buddhā nāma anuddayasampannā honti, mahallakabhāvaṃ ñatvā sīghaṃ okāsaṃ karissatīti evamāha.
391 「他迅速起身让出空间」(Oramiya okāsamakāsīti):他迅速起身,大地裂为两半,让出了一条通道。显示巴利原文
391.Oramiya okāsamakāsīti vegena uṭṭhāya dvidhā bhijjitvā okāsamakāsi.
「为我所作者」(Ye meti):即由我所作。「当以女性化名词呼之者」(Nārīsamānasavhayāti):其名称为“似女”,属阴性名词,因此当用此词称呼,亦即“当以女性化名词呼之者”,意思是应当以阴性名词来称呼它。这是基于用词的善巧才如此宣说。「广舌者」(Pahūtajivhoti):即舌头宽阔者。「应当伸出」(Ninnāmayetanti):将那个舌头伸出来。显示巴利原文
Ye meti ye mayā. Nārīsamānasavhayāti nārīsamānanāmaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ, tena avhātabbāti nārīsamānasavhayā, itthiliṅgena vattabbāti vohārakusalatāya evaṃ vadati. Pahūtajivhoti puthulajivho. Ninnāmayetanti nīhara etaṃ.
393 「一切具足者」(Kevalīti):一切功德悉皆具足者。显示巴利原文
393.Kevalīti sakalaguṇasampanno.
394 “回答”:当八个问题被一次性问起时,他一并作了解答。“知者”:他知晓、了知,即他的宿命住已清楚明了。“且见天界及恶趣”:这是指天眼智。“达生尽”:证得阿拉汉果。“依胜知而究竟”:由证知阿拉汉果而达究竟,达到最极清净。“牟尼”:即具足阿拉汉智的牟尼。显示巴利原文
394.Paccabhāsīti ekappahārena pucchite aṭṭha pañhe byākaronto patiabhāsi. Yo vedīti yo vidati jānāti, yassa pubbenivāso pākaṭo. Saggāpāyañca passatīti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Jātikkhayaṃpattoti arahattaṃ patto. Abhiññā vositoti taṃ arahattaṃ abhijānitvā vosito vosānappatto. Munīti arahattañāṇamoneyyena samannāgato.
“清净”:洁白。“从贪解脱”:从烦恼贪中解脱出来。“断生与死”:由于到达了生的尽头,故为断生者;由断生故,为断死者。“梵行之全具者”:具足梵行的完整整体,意思是圆满住于四道梵行。“于一切法到彼岸”:以胜知到达一切世间、出世间法的彼岸,亦即了知一切法而安住。或者,“到彼岸”有这些意义:对五取蕴,是遍知到彼岸;对一切烦恼,是断除到彼岸;对四道,是修习到彼岸;对灭,是作证到彼岸;对一切定,是等至到彼岸。又,“一切法”这一句,是说明胜知到彼岸。“佛陀,如是称为”:像这样由六种方式到达彼岸,并在一切方面觉悟了四谛,因此称为“佛陀”。显示巴利原文
Visuddhanti paṇḍaraṃ. Muttaṃ rāgehīti kilesarāgehi muttaṃ. Pahīnajātimaraṇoti jātikkhayappattattā pahīnajātiko, jātipahāneneva pahīnamaraṇo. Brahmacariyassa kevalīti yaṃ brahmacariyassa kevalī sakalabhāvo, tena samannāgato, sakalacatumaggabrahmacariyavāsoti attho. Pāragū sabbadhammānanti sabbesaṃ lokiyalokuttaradhammānaṃ abhiññāya pāraṃ gato, sabbadhamme abhijānitvā ṭhitoti attho. Pāragūti vā ettāvatā pariññāpāragū pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ, pahānapāragū sabbakilesānaṃ , bhāvanāpāragū catunnaṃ maggānaṃ, sacchikiriyāpāragū nirodhassa, samāpattipāragū sabbasamāpattīnanti ayamattho vutto. Puna sabbadhammānanti iminā abhiññāpāragū vuttoti. Buddho tādī pavuccatīti tādiso chahi ākārehi pāraṃ gato sabbākārena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhattā buddhoti pavuccatīti.
问:这样,所有的问题都解答了吗?答:是的,都已解答。由“心清净,从诸贪解脱”这一句,因为已舍断了罪恶,故称为“婆罗门”,由此解答了第一个问题。由“度彼岸”一句,因为通达了诸吠陀,故称为“明吠陀者”,由此解答了第二个问题。由“宿住……”等句,因为具备这三种明,故称为“三明者”,由此解答了第三个问题。由“从一切贪解脱”一句,因为由此从诸恶法出离,故称为“多闻者”,由此解答了第四个问题。由“达到生灭尽”一句,这正是在说阿拉汉果,由此解答了第五个问题。由“已完成”和“梵行之究竟者”等句,由此解答了第六个问题。由“以证智究竟者,牟尼”一句,由此解答了第七个问题。由“度一切法之彼岸,彼如来被称为如来”一句,由此解答了第八个问题。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana ettāvatā sabbe pañhā vissajjitā hontīti? Āma vissajjitā, cittaṃ visuddhaṃ jānāti, muttaṃ rāgehīti iminā tāva bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇoti paṭhamapañho vissajjito hoti. Pāragūti iminā vedehi gatattā vedagūti dutiyapañho vissajjito hoti. Pubbenivāsantiādīhi imāsaṃ tissannaṃ vijjānaṃ atthitāya tevijjoti tatiyapañho vissajjito hoti. Muttaṃ rāgehi sabbasoti imināva nissaṭattā pāpadhammānaṃ sottiyoti catutthapañho vissajjito hoti. Jātikkhayaṃ pattoti iminā pana arahattasseva vuttattā pañcamapañho vissajjito hoti. Vositoti ca brahmacariyassa kevalīti ca imehi chaṭṭhapañho vissajjito hoti. Abhiññā vosito munīti iminā sattamapañho vissajjito hoti. Pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ, buddho tādī pavuccatīti iminā aṭṭhamapañho vissajjito hoti.
395 “布施论”等内容,在先前经典中已详尽说明。“他实行”即他付诸实践。关于“法随法”,此经中“法”指阿拉汉道,“随法”指较低的三道及三种沙门果,意为次第证得。“他并没有以法为由而困扰我”,意即没有因法的缘故令我疲累,没有反复要我讲述。其余各处义理清晰。而“般涅槃者”一词,则表明说法以阿拉汉果为顶点。显示巴利原文
395.Dānakathantiādīni heṭṭhā sutte vitthāritāneva. Paccapādīti paṭipajji. Dhammassānudhammanti imasmiṃ sutte dhammo nāma arahattamaggo, anudhammo nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca sāmaññaphalāni, tāni paṭipāṭiyā paṭilabhīti attho. Na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesesīti mañca dhammakāraṇā na kilamesi, na punappunaṃ kathāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Tattha parinibbāyīti pana padena desanāya arahatteneva kūṭaṃ gahitanti.
第二 塞拉经释义显示巴利原文
2. Selasuttavaṇṇanā
396 “如是我闻”,此为塞拉经。其中“在鸯古答拉人……”等内容,在晡利多经中已详细说明。“以半十三”是指以一半和十三,即与一千二百五十位比丘一同随行。那些是在声闻集会中聚集的比丘,全是通过“善来,比丘”方式出家、诸漏已尽者。葛尼耶是他的名字,一位结发苦行者。据说他本是婆罗门大富豪,为保全财产而受持苦行者的出家方式,他献礼国王,获得一块地,在那里建造修行处居住,用五百辆车经营贸易,成为一千户家族的依靠。其修行处有棵棕榈树,据说每天结一颗金色棕榈果。他白天着袈裟、扎发髻,夜间则享受欲乐成就。“以法谈”指与饮品功德相关的法谈。的确,这位葛尼耶空手去见世尊觉得难为情,心想:“持守离非时食的人,饮料是允许的”,便让人带上用五百担精心调制的枣子饮料前去。他前往的情形在《药犍度》(大品300)的巴利文中已有记载:“那时,结发者葛尼耶心想:‘我该拿什么给沙门乔达摩呢?’显示巴利原文
396.Evaṃme sutanti selasuttaṃ. Tattha aṅguttarāpesūtiādi potaliyasutte vitthāritameva. Aḍḍhateḷasehīti aḍḍhena teḷasehi, dvādasahi satehi paññāsāya ca bhikkhūhi saddhinti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana sāvakasannipāte sannipatitā bhikkhūyeva sabbe ehibhikkhupabbajjāya pabbajitā khīṇāsavā. Keṇiyoti tassa nāmaṃ, jaṭiloti tāpaso. So kira brāhmaṇamahāsālo, dhanarakkhaṇatthāya pana tāpasapabbajjaṃ samādāya rañño paṇṇākāraṃ datvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā tattha assamaṃ kāretvā vasati pañcahi sakaṭasatehi vaṇijjaṃ payojetvā kulasahassassa nissayo hutvā, assamepi cassa eko tālarukkho divase divase ekaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ tālaphalaṃ muñcatīti vadanti. So divā kāsāyāni dhāreti, jaṭā ca bandhati, rattiṃ kāmasampattiṃ anubhavati. Dhammiyā kathāyāti pānakānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya. Ayañhi keṇiyo tucchahattho bhagavato dassanāya gantuṃ lajjāyamāno – ‘‘vikālabhojanā viratānampi pānakaṃ kappatī’’ti cintetvā susaṅkhatabadarapānaṃ pañcahi kājasatehi gāhāpetvā agamāsi. Evaṃ gatabhāvo cassa – ‘‘atha kho keṇiyassa jaṭilassa etadahosi kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa harāpeyya’’nti bhesajjakkhandhake (mahāva. 300) pāḷiāruḷhoyeva.
为何世尊要一再拒绝?是为了让外道对拒绝生起净信。其实并非有其他原因,诸佛不会因供养的条件而如此欺诳。世尊看到这一千二百五十位比丘后心想:“他只会为这些比丘准备食物;而这位塞拉将和三百人一同出家。但是,把新出家的比丘遣往别处、只与原先的比丘同行,或者把原先的比丘遣往别处、只与新出家的比丘同行,都不合适。若把所有比丘都带去,乞食将不足。若比丘们届时去行乞,人们便会抱怨:‘过了这么久,葛尼耶邀请了沙门乔达摩,竟连维生的食物都给不了。’他自己也会懊悔。然而,被拒绝后,他会想:‘沙门乔达摩一再提起你净信婆罗门们,提起了婆罗门的名号。’于是,他便会想去邀请婆罗门们。之后他就会另外去邀请,那些受邀的人将成为比丘而用餐。这样,他的信心就得到了保护。”因此世尊一再拒绝。他通过“尽管……尊者”这句话表达的是:“乔达摩尊者啊,就算我净信婆罗门们,又怎样呢?请尊者接受,我也完全能为婆罗门们和你们提供。”显示巴利原文
Dutiyampi kho bhagavāti kasmā punappunaṃ paṭikkhipi? Titthiyānaṃ paṭikkhepapasannatāya, akāraṇametaṃ, natthi buddhānaṃ paccayahetu evarūpaṃ kohaññaṃ. Ayaṃ pana aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni disvā ettakānaṃyeva bhikkhaṃ paṭiyādessati, sveva selo tīhi purisasatehi saddhiṃ pabbajissati. Ayuttaṃ kho pana navake aññato pesetvā imeheva saddhiṃ gantuṃ, ime vā aññato pesetvā navakehi saddhiṃ gantuṃ. Athāpi sabbe gahetvā gamissāmi, bhikkhāhāro nappahossati. Tato bhikkhūsu piṇḍāya carantesu manussā ujjhāyissanti – ‘‘cirassāpi keṇiyo samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ nimantetvā yāpanamattaṃ dātuṃ nāsakkhī’’ti, sayampi vippaṭisārī bhavissati. Paṭikkhepe pana kate ‘‘samaṇo gotamo punappunaṃ ‘tvañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno’ti brāhmaṇānaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti cintetvā brāhmaṇepi nimantetukāmo bhavissati, tato brāhmaṇe pāṭiyekkaṃ nimantessati , te tena nimantitā bhikkhū hutvā bhuñjissanti. Evamassa saddhā anurakkhitā bhavissatīti punappunaṃ paṭikkhipi. Kiñcāpi kho, bhoti iminā idaṃ dīpeti, – ‘‘bho gotama, kiṃ jātaṃ yadi ahaṃ brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno, adhivāsetu bhavaṃ gotamo, ahaṃ brāhmaṇānampi dātuṃ sakkomi tumhākampī’’ti.
“身服务”指身体方面的服侍。“圆堂”即用布搭设的帐幕。显示巴利原文
Kāyaveyyāvaṭikanti kāyaveyyāvaccaṃ. Maṇḍalamāḷanti dussamaṇḍapaṃ.
397 「迎」指迎娶新娘。「送」指出嫁女儿。“他是我邀请的”意思是:他是我所邀请的人。那时,这位婆罗门由于亲依止缘已经成熟,一听到“佛陀”一词,犹如被甘露灌顶,生起净信,说道:“给尼耶贤者,你说‘佛陀’吗?”给尼耶如实告诉他:“谢拉贤者,我说‘佛陀’。”随后,谢拉为了坚定信念,又再问了一遍,他也同样回答。显示巴利原文
397.Āvāhoti kaññāgahaṇaṃ. Vivāhoti kaññādānaṃ. So me nimantitoti so mayā nimantito. Atha brāhmaṇo paripakkopanissayattā buddhasaddaṃ sutvāva amatenevābhisitto pasādaṃ āvikaronto buddhoti, bho keṇiya, vadesīti āha. Keṇiyo yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhanto buddhoti, bho sela, vadāmīti āha. Tato naṃ punapi daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ pucchi, itaropi tatheva ārocesi.
398 那时,他观察到即使经百千劫,“佛陀”一词也极难听闻,便这样想:“音声也……”等。「深蓝林带」指深蓝色的树列。「步中的步」:此处“步”指一步的距离。若脚步踏得过近或过远,便会发出声音,为了令其避免,故如此说。「如狮子独行」:群居的狮子与幼狮等共住时会放逸,独行则不放逸。如此为了显示不放逸而住,以独行狮子为喻。「诸贤友,请勿……」他教导威仪而说。这里的深义是:如果你们未经允许便在我说话时插话,就会有人指责我:“他未能教导弟子。”因此,应见机再交谈。然而「我不知道」:毗婆尸菩萨被八万四千位已出家的长老比丘围绕,作七个月的菩萨游行时,已如同佛陀出世之时。而我们的菩萨游行仅六年。这样,即便具足圆满身相,也未必就是佛陀。因此婆罗门说:“然而我不知道。”显示巴利原文
398. Athassa kappasatasahassehipi buddhasaddasseva dullabhabhāvaṃ sampassato. Etadahosīti. Etaṃ ‘‘ghosopi kho’’tiādi ahosi. Nīlavanarājīti nīlavaṇṇarukkhapanti. Pade padanti padappamāṇe padaṃ. Accāsanne hi atidūre vā pāde nikkhipamāne saddo uṭṭhāti, taṃ paṭisedhento evamāha. Sīhāva ekacarāti gaṇavāsī sīho sīhapotakādīhi saddhiṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ekacaro appamatto hoti. Iti appamādavihāraṃ dassento ekacarasīhena opammaṃ karoti. Mā me bhontoti ācāraṃ sikkhāpento āha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sace tumhe kathāvāraṃ alabhitvā mama kathāya antare kathaṃ pavesessatha, ‘‘antevāsike sikkhāpetuṃ nāsakkhī’’ti mayhaṃ garahā uppajjissati, tasmā okāsaṃ passitvā manteyyāthāti. No ca kho naṃ jānāmīti vipassīpi bodhisatto caturāsītisahassattherapabbajitaparivāro satta māsāni bodhisattacārikaṃ cari, buddhuppādakālo viya ahosi. Amhākampi bodhisatto chabbassāni bodhisattacārikaṃ cari. Evaṃ paripuṇṇasarīralakkhaṇehi samannāgatāpi buddhā na honti. Tasmā brāhmaṇo ‘‘no ca kho naṃ jānāmī’’ti āha.
399 「身圆满」是指因种种相好具足、无有残缺而身相圆满。「好光」是指殊妙的身光。「善生」是指高矮胖瘦合宜、体态端严,因而善生。「悦目」是指即便长久注视亦不生厌足、令人心神愉悦的容貌。「金色」是指如同黄金的颜色。「白齿」是指极为洁白的牙齿。以上便是「大人相」——用不同的表述方式,总结前文所说的种种特征。显示巴利原文
399.Paripuṇṇakāyoti lakkhaṇehi paripuṇṇatāya ahīnaṅgatāya ca paripuṇṇasarīro. Surucīti sundarasarīrappabho. Sujātoti ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā saṇṭhānasampattiyā ca sunibbatto. Cārudassanoti sucirampi passantānaṃ atittijanako manoharadassano. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇoti suvaṇṇasadisavaṇṇo. Susukkadāṭhoti suṭṭhu sukkadāṭho. Mahāpurisalakkhaṇāti paṭhamaṃ vuttabyañjanāneva vacanantarena nigamento āha.
现在,从这些相好之中选取自己心所喜爱的部分来做赞叹,于是说了「净眼」等语。世尊实因五种净色的成就而有净眼,因面容如满月而有妙相,因高矮胖瘦合宜而有高广之身,因身如梵天般端直而有正直之姿,因具足光辉而有威德。至于其中前面已经说过的内容,则是以「在沙门僧团中」这样的方式来作赞叹、再次提及,正是因此,他才如此闪耀。后面的偈颂也是同样的道理。「最上色者」是指具有最上色身的人。「车王」是指最上的调御者。「赡部洲林」是指赡部洲洲。凭借显赫的威德,他成为自在者。显示巴利原文
Idāni tesu lakkhaṇesu attano cittarucitāni gahetvā thomento pasannanettotiādimāha. Bhagavā hi pañcavaṇṇapasādasampattiyā pasannanetto, puṇṇacandasadisamukhatāya sumukho, ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā brahā, brahmujugattatāya uju, jutimantatāya patāpavā. Yampi cettha pubbe vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘majjhe samaṇasaṅghassā’’ti iminā pariyāyena thomayatā puna vuttaṃ. Ediso hi evaṃ virocati. Uttaragāthāyapi eseva nayo. Uttamavaṇṇīnoti uttamavaṇṇasampannassa. Rathesabhoti uttamasārathi. Jambusaṇḍassāti jambudīpassa. Pākaṭena issariyaṃ issaro hoti.
「刹帝利」是指出生于刹帝利种姓的人。「富有者」是指拥有财富的人。「国王」是指一切行使王权的人。「王中王」是指在国王之中受尊敬者,即成为大王,意指转轮王。「人主」是指成为人众之尊、最高自在者。显示巴利原文
Khattiyāti jātikhattiyā. Bhogīti bhogiyā. Rājānoti ye keci rajjaṃ kārentā. Rājābhirājāti rājūnaṃ pūjanīyo, adhirājā hutvā, cakkavattīti adhippāyo. Manujindoti manussādhipati paramissaro hutvā.
世尊闻言,为满足塞拉婆罗门的心愿——“那些阿拉汉、正自觉者,当自己的功德被宣说时,便会显现自身”,于是说“我是王”等语。此中意谓:“塞拉!你请求‘您堪作王’,对此不必劳心,我本身即是王。然而,在王权方面,其余国王所统治的疆域,或百由旬,或千由旬,即便转轮王也仅限于四洲之内,而我的疆域却无这些界限。我是无上的法王,纵向从最高的有顶天直到无间地狱,横向则统御无量的世界。大凡无足、二足等一切众生,我皆是其中最上者。在戒……乃至解脱知见方面,无有能与我相比者。我正是如此无上的法王,以无上的四念处等法门而转动法轮。‘舍弃此,成就彼而安住’,是为教诫轮;或如‘诸比丘,此是苦圣谛……’等,以教理法转动的,则是法轮。此轮不退转,意即:在这世间,无论沙门……还是其他任何人,都无法令其退转。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte bhagavā – ‘‘ye te bhavanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā, te sakavaṇṇe bhaññamāne attānaṃ pātukarontī’’ti imaṃ selassa manorathaṃ pūrento rājāhamasmītiādimāha. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yaṃ maṃ tvaṃ sela ‘‘rājā arahasi bhavitu’’nti yācasi, ettha appossukko hoti rājāhamasmi. Sati ca rājatte yathā añño rājā yojanasataṃ vā anusāsati yojanasahassaṃ vā, cakkavattī hutvāpi catudīpapariyantamattaṃ vā, nāhamevaṃ paricchinnavisayo, ahañhi dhammarājā anuttaro bhavaggato avīcipariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ appamāṇalokadhātuyo anusāsāmi. Yāvatā hi apadadvipadādibhedā sattā, ahaṃ tesaṃ aggo. Na hi me koci sīlena vā…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanena vā paṭibhāgo atthi, svāhaṃ evaṃ dhammarājā anuttaro anuttareneva catusatipaṭṭhānādibhedena dhammena cakkaṃ vattemi. Idaṃ pajahatha, idaṃ upasampajja viharathāti āṇācakkaṃ, idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhaṃ ariyasaccantiādinā pariyattidhammena dhammacakkameva vā. Cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti yaṃ cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ hoti samaṇena vā…pe… kenaci vā lokasminti.
塞拉婆罗门见世尊如此显现自身,心生喜悦与欢悦。为作确认,他诵出两首偈颂:“正自觉者您自称……”其中问道“谁是将军?”意即:“贤主您以法转动法轮,那么随您转动法轮的将军是谁呢?”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ attānaṃ āvikarontaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvā pītisomanassajāto selo puna daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ sambuddho paṭijānāsīti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha ko nu senāpatīti rañño bhoto dhammena pavattitassa cakkassa anupavattako senāpati ko nūti pucchi.
那时,尊者舍利弗坐于世尊右侧,犹如一堆黄金,光彩闪耀。世尊指着他,诵出“由我所转”的偈颂。其中“随如来而生”,意指以如来为因而随生,也就是由如来为因而出生。再者,有劣生、随生、超生三种说法。其中,劣生是犯戒者,不算是如来的儿子;超生是指超胜于父亲的人,这样的人也不是如来的儿子。如来仅有此随生之子。为阐明此理,世尊如此说道。显示巴利原文
Tena ca samayena bhagavato dakkhiṇapasse āyasmā sāriputto nisinno hoti suvaṇṇapuñjo viya siriyā sobhamāno, taṃ dassento bhagavā mayā pavattitanti gāthamāha. Tattha anujāto tathāgatanti tathāgataṃ hetuṃ anujāto, tathāgatena hetunā jātoti attho. Apica avajāto anujāto atijātoti tayo vuttā. Tesu avajāto dussīlo, so tathāgatassa putto nāma na hoti. Atijāto nāma pitarā uttaritaro, tādisopi tathāgatassa putto natthi. Tathāgatassa pana eko anujātova putto hoti, taṃ dassento evamāha.
世尊如此回答“谁是将军”的问题后,为使塞罗对其所言“正自觉者您自称”确信无疑,便诵出“应证知”偈颂,以表明:“我并非仅凭宣称而自称,而是以此因由成为佛陀。”其中,“应证知”指明与解脱;“应修”指道圣谛;“应断”指集圣谛。而由于是因上说,从果的成就而言,灭圣谛与苦圣谛便也隐含地提及。如此,“应作证的已作证,应遍知的已遍知”亦含摄其中,显示了四圣谛的修习之果与解脱,而说“应觉悟的已觉悟,我已成佛”,以如理因由证成佛位。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘ko nu senāpatī’’ti pañhaṃ byākaritvā yaṃ selo āha ‘‘sambuddho paṭijānāsī’’ti, tatra naṃ nikkaṅkhaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘nāhaṃ paṭiññāmatteneva paṭijānāmi, apicāhaṃ iminā kāraṇena buddho’’ti ñāpetuṃ abhiññeyyanti gāthamāha. Tatra abhiññeyyanti vijjā ca vimutti ca. Bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ. Pahātabbaṃ samudayasaccaṃ. Hetuvacanena pana phalasiddhito tesaṃ phalāni nirodhasaccadukkhasaccānipi vuttāneva honti. Evaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikataṃ pariññātabbaṃ pariññātanti idampettha saṅgahitanti catusaccabhāvanāphalañca vimuttiñca dassento ‘‘bujjhitabbaṃ bujjhitvā buddho jātosmī’’ti yuttahetunā buddhabhāvaṃ sādheti.
世尊如此全然显现自身后,为拔除婆罗门对自身的疑惑,教导他而说了“应调伏”等三首偈颂。其中,“拔箭者”指拔除贪等箭矢之人。“无上”:外道医生所平息的疾病,于此生命体中仍会复发;而我所平息的疾病,于未来有中亦不再生起,故我为无上者。“梵已立”指成为最胜者。“无比”指超越衡量,无可比拟。“摧伏魔军”:即摧破“欲是你的第一支军队”等所说的魔军。“一切敌”即指蕴、烦恼、行、死、天子魔等一切怨敌。“调伏”指令其随顺己意。“无所畏”指从一切处皆无怖畏。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nippariyāyena attānaṃ āvikatvā attani kaṅkhāvitaraṇatthaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ aticāriyamāno vinayassūti gāthattayamāha. Tattha sallakattoti rāgādisallakantano. Anuttaroti yathā bāhiravejjena vūpasamitarogo imasmiññevattabhāve kuppati, na evaṃ. Mayā vūpasamitassa pana rogassa bhavantarepi uppatti natthi, tasmā ahaṃ anuttaroti attho. Brahmabhūtoti seṭṭhabhūto. Atituloti tulaṃ atīto, nirupamoti attho. Mārasenappamaddanoti kāmā te paṭhamā senāti evaṃ āgatāya mārasenāya pamaddano. Sabbāmitteti khandhakilesābhisaṅkhāramaccudevaputtamārasaṅkhāte sabbapaccatthike. Vasīkatvāti attano vase vattetvā. Akutobhayoti kutoci abhayo.
世尊如此说后,塞罗婆罗门即刻对世尊生起净信,期望出家,便说了“这些贤者”等三首偈颂。其中,“黑生者”指生于旃陀罗等下贱家族者。随后,那些学童也期望出家,便说了“若如此合您心意,贤者”的偈颂。于是塞罗对那些学童心生欢喜,将他们展示出来,乞求出家而说了“婆罗门”偈颂。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte selo brāhmaṇo tāvadeva bhagavati sañjātapasādo pabbajjāpekkho hutvā imaṃ bhontoti gāthattayamāha. Tattha kaṇhābhijātikoti caṇḍālādinīcakule jāto. Tato tepi māṇavakā pabbajjāpekkhā hutvā evañce ruccati, bhototi gāthamāhaṃsu. Atha selo tesu māṇavakesu tuṭṭhacitto te ca dassento pabbajjaṃ yācanto ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti gāthamāha.
于是,世尊即为此因缘而说了“善说”等偈颂:过去在莲花上佛的教法中,塞罗本是那三百人众的首领,他曾率领众人建造精舍,并修习布施等福德。依此业而辗转受用人天胜妙果报,至最后有,又出生为他们的老师。此业复成为解脱果圆满的近缘,兼为善来比丘身份的近缘,因而世尊令他们全体以善来比丘的形式出家。其中,“现见”是说可亲自现见,是现量亲证的。“非时”指证道后果即刻现前,而非历经时间间隔才得果。“于此非空”意为:在那道梵行中,精勤者通过圆满三学而修学,其出家决不会空无果报,即定有成果之义。说此偈已,世尊又道:“来,诸比丘!”他们便各持衣钵自空中降下,诸根调伏,有如已届百岁的长老比丘,前来顶礼世尊。如此,就其善来比丘身份,而有“塞罗得到”之说。显示巴利原文
Tato bhagavā yasmā selo atīte padumuttarassa bhagavato sāsane tesaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ purisasatānaṃ gaṇaseṭṭho hutvā tehi saddhiṃ pariveṇaṃ kāretvā dānādīni puññāni katvā tena kammena devamanussasampattiṃ anubhavamāno pacchime bhave tesaṃyeva ācariyo hutvā nibbatto, tañca tesaṃ kammaṃ vimuttiparipākāya paripakkaṃ ehibhikkhubhāvassa ca upanissayabhūtaṃ, tasmā te sabbeva ehibhikkhupabbajjaṃ pabbājento svākkhātanti gāthamāha. Tattha sandiṭṭhikanti sayameva daṭṭhabbaṃ paccakkhaṃ. Akālikanti maggānantaraphaluppattiyā na kālantaraṃ pattabbaphalaṃ. Yattha amoghāti yasmiṃ maggabrahmacariye appamattassa sikkhattayapūraṇena sikkhato pabbajjā amoghā hoti, saphalāti attho. Evañca vatvā ‘‘etha bhikkhavo’’ti bhagavā avoca. Te sabbe pattacīvaradharā hutvā ākāsenāgantvā vassasatikattherā viya suvinītā bhagavantaṃ abhivādayiṃsu. Evamimaṃ tesaṃ ehibhikkhubhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘alattha kho selo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
400 “以这些”(Imāhīti),指以这些令给尼亚心生欢喜的偈颂。偈颂中,因婆罗门若离了事火便无祭祀可言,故说“火供为祭祀之首”(aggihuttamukhā yaññā),意谓火供最胜,即以投火供养为主要的祭祀。于讽诵吠陀时,萨维特丽赞歌因是首先讽诵的,故被称为“韵文之口”(chandaso mukha)。国王因在人类中最为尊胜,而被称为“口”(mukha)。大海是诸河流的容纳处与庇护所,故被称为“口”。月亮与星宿相应,能使人了知“今日是昴宿日,今日是毕宿日”,并能施予光明,其性清凉,故被称为“星宿之口”(nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando)。太阳在一切发光体中最为殊胜,故被称为“发光体之口”(tapataṃ mukha)。然而,若论应受供养者中的最胜者,则特指当时以佛为首的僧团,因此说:“于希求福德者中,僧伽正是祭祀之口”(puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānānaṃ, saṅgho eva yajataṃ mukha)。由此指出:僧团乃是福德的入口。显示巴利原文
400.Imāhīti imāhi keṇiyassa cittānukūlāhi gāthāhi. Tattha aggiparicariyaṃ vinā brāhmaṇānaṃ yaññābhāvato ‘‘aggihuttamukhā yaññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aggihuttaseṭṭhā aggijuhanappadhānāti attho. Vede sajjhāyantehi paṭhamaṃ sajjhāyitabbato, sāvittī, ‘‘chandaso mukha’’nti vutto. Manussānaṃ seṭṭhato rājā ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Nadīnaṃ ādhārato paṭisaraṇato ca sāgaro ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Candayogavasena ‘‘ajja kattikā ajja rohiṇī’’ti saññāṇato ālokakaraṇato sommabhāvato ca ‘‘nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando’’ti vuttaṃ. Tapantānaṃ aggattā ādicco ‘‘tapataṃ mukha’’nti vutto. Dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ pana aggattā visesena tasmiṃ samaye buddhappamukhaṃ saṅghaṃ sandhāya ‘‘puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānānaṃ, saṅgho eva yajataṃ mukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena saṅgho puññassa āyamukhanti dasseti.
“那皈依”(Yaṃ taṃ saraṇaṃ)等,是另一首解说义理的偈颂。其意为:世尊具足五眼,乃是有眼者。因为从今日起的第八天,我们已获得此皈依,所以在您的教法中,我们被无上的调伏法所调伏。啊!皈依的威力,真是不可思议!显示巴利原文
Yaṃ taṃ saraṇanti aññaṃ byākaraṇagāthamāha. Tassattho – pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā bhagavā yasmā mayaṃ ito aṭṭhame divase taṃ saraṇaṃ āgatamhā, tasmā attanā tava sāsane anuttarena damathena dantāmhā, aho te saraṇassa ānubhāvoti.
此后,他以两首偈颂赞叹世尊,又以第三首偈颂请求顶礼,诵出“比丘们三百位……”等语。显示巴利原文
Tato paraṃ bhagavantaṃ dvīhi gāthāhi thometvā tatiyāya vandanaṃ yācanto bhikkhavo tisatā imetiādimāhāti.
3.《阿摄惒经》释义显示巴利原文
3. Assalāyanasuttavaṇṇanā
401 “如是我闻”等,即是《阿摄惒经》。其中,“来自种种异地之人”(nānāverajjakānaṃ)是指从鹑伽、摩揭陀等种种不同外地而来的人,也指在那些国土出生与长大的人。“以某一种事务”(kenacideva)是指未被祭祀、近行等特定事务所限定的工作。“四种种姓”(cātuvaṇṇa)就是四种姓共通的工作。然而我们却说:“婆罗门是由沐浴清净、修习清净而清净的。”他们心中这样思惟,认为沙门乔达摩做了不该做的事。“剃了头发者”(vuttasiro)就是剃除了头发的人。显示巴利原文
401.Evaṃme sutanti assalāyanasuttaṃ. Tattha nānāverajjakānanti aṅgamagadhādīhi nānappakārehi verajjehi āgatānaṃ, tesu vā raṭṭhesu jātasaṃvaḍḍhānantipi attho. Kenacidevāti yaññupāsanādinā aniyamitakiccena. Cātuvaṇṇinti catuvaṇṇasādhāraṇaṃ. Mayaṃ pana nhānasuddhiyā bhāvanāsuddhiyāpi brāhmaṇāva sujjhantīti vadāma, ayuttampi samaṇo gotamo karotīti maññamānā evaṃ cintayiṃsu. Vuttasiroti vāpitasiro.
“说法者”(Dhammavādī)是指说真实语的人。“难以辩论的”(Duppaṭimantiyā):像我们这些说非法的人,很难与他们辩论。这表示说正法的人不可能被击败。“游方者”(Paribbājaka)是一种出家方式:他们学习三吠陀后,在最后才出家;他们以某些咒语出家,出家后又奉持那些咒语,或者奉行某种行仪。贤者,这一切您都已奉行、修学了。因此,他们想您不可能落败,必定会取得胜利,而说出了这番话。显示巴利原文
Dhammavādīti sabhāvavādī. Duppaṭimantiyāti amhādisehi adhammavādīhi dukkhena paṭimantitabbā honti. Dhammavādino nāma parājayo na sakkā kātunti dasseti. Paribbājakanti pabbajjāvidhānaṃ, tayo vede uggahetvā sabbapacchā pabbajantā yehi mantehi pabbajanti, pabbajitā ca ye mante pariharanti, yaṃ vā ācāraṃ ācaranti, taṃ sabbaṃ bhotā caritaṃ sikkhitaṃ. Tasmā tuyhaṃ parājayo natthi, jayova bhavissatīti maññantā evamāhaṃsu.
402 「然而可见……」等语,是为破除他们的恶见而说。其中,「婆罗门女」是指为了给婆罗门生子续嗣,通过迎娶婚嫁的仪礼从族中娶来的婆罗门女子,她们是可见的。然而,这些女子随后也会有「有经期者」,即月经来潮。「怀孕者」即是怀有胎儿。「分娩者」即是生养儿女。「哺乳者」即是哺喂婴儿。她们同样是从产道所生——同是由婆罗门女的产道出生的人,却这样说:「婆罗门是最胜种姓……婆罗门是大梵天的继承人。」如果这些言语真实,那么婆罗门女的胎宫就应是大梵天的胸膛,婆罗门女的产道就应是大梵天的口。仅就这一点而言,「我们住于大梵天的胸中,从口而生」的说法便不能成立了。这便是破斥「从口而生」之论。显示巴利原文
402.Dissanti kho panātiādi tesaṃ laddhibhindanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha brāhmaṇiyoti brāhmaṇānaṃ puttapaṭilābhatthāya āvāhavivāhavasena kulā ānītā brāhmaṇiyo dissanti . Tā kho panetā aparena samayena utuniyopi honti, sañjātapupphāti attho. Gabbhiniyoti sañjātagabbhā. Vijāyamānāti puttadhītaro janayamānā. Pāyamānāti dārake thaññaṃ pāyantiyo. Yonijāva samānāti brāhmaṇīnaṃ passāvamaggena jātā samānā. Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Kathaṃ? Brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo…pe… brahmadāyādāti. Yadi pana nesaṃ saccavacanaṃ siyā, brāhmaṇīnaṃ kucchi mahābrahmuno uro bhaveyya, brāhmaṇīnaṃ passāvamaggo mahābrahmuno mukhaṃ bhaveyya, ettāvatā ‘‘mayaṃ mahābrahmuno ure vasitvā mukhato nikkhantā’’ti vattuṃ mā labhantūti ayaṃ mukhato jātacchedakavādo vutto.
403 「主人沦为奴隶,奴隶成为主人」:例如,有婆罗门携妻经商,前往臾那迦国或剑浮阇国,在那里死去。他家中若无成年儿子,婆罗门女便与奴隶或仆役同居。一旦生下一个男孩,那名男子依然是奴隶,而他所生的这个男孩却成为财产的继承人。如此,由母系而言是清净的,由父系而言则不清净。那男孩长大后同样去经商,前往中部地方,娶一婆罗门少女为妻,她于胎中得子;这个孩子同样是由母系而言清净,由父系而言不清净。这是为了显示:即便在婆罗门自己的教说中,种姓的混杂依然存在。「什么力量?什么依怙?」意思是说:在你们那里,成为奴隶时便全都是奴隶,成为主人时便全都是主人。你们是凭什么能力、什么依托,而说婆罗门是最胜种姓的呢?显示巴利原文
403.Ayyo hutvā dāso hoti, dāso hutvā ayyo hotīti brāhmaṇo sabhariyo vaṇijjaṃ payojento yonakaraṭṭhaṃ vā kambojaraṭṭhaṃ vā gantvā kālaṃ karoti, tassa gehe vayappatte putte asati brāhmaṇī dāsena vā kammakarena vā saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappeti. Ekasmiṃ dārake jāte so puriso dāsova hoti, tassa jātadārako pana dāyajjasāmiko hoti. Mātito suddho pitito asuddho so vaṇijjaṃ payojento majjhimapadesaṃ gantvā brāhmaṇadārikaṃ gahetvā tassā kucchismiṃ puttaṃ paṭilabhati, sopi mātitova suddho hoti pitito asuddho. Evaṃ brāhmaṇasamayasmiññeva jātisambhedo hotīti dassanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiṃbalaṃ, ko assāsoti yattha tumhe dāsā hontā sabbeva dāsā hotha, ayyā hontā sabbeva ayyā hotha, ettha vo ko thāmo, ko avassayo, yaṃ brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇoti vadathāti dīpeti.
404 「刹帝利青年……等」,称为「断经之论」。显示巴利原文
404.Khattiyova nu khotiādayo suttacchedakavādā nāma honti.
408 现在,为了显示四种姓的清净,经文说:“在这里,国王……”等。“在狗饮水槽”是指狗饮水的槽。“火事”指驱寒、除暗、煮饭等与火相关的事务。此处的“阿摄惒”,即指从事这一切火事的人。显示巴利原文
408. Idāni cātuvaṇṇisuddhiṃ dassento idha rājātiādimāha. Sāpānadoṇiyāti sunakhānaṃ pivanadoṇiyā. Aggikaraṇīyanti sītavinodanaandhakāravidhamanabhattapacanādi aggikiccaṃ. Ettha assalāyanāti ettha sabbasmiṃ aggikiccaṃ karonte.
409 现在,婆罗门们宣称“四姓清净”,但所谓“四姓”并非定论,因为实际还存在第五种贱种姓。为了简要指出他们论点的过失,经中遂说“刹帝利青年”等。“而在那里与别处,对于这些人”的意思是:在之前的论例中,我曾说看不出这些年轻人有何差别,然而差别确实存在。刹帝利青年与婆罗门少女所生者,称为刹帝利低阶者;另一个由婆罗门低阶者所生者,则称为婆罗门低阶者。他们皆属出身低贱的青年。显示巴利原文
409. Idāni yadetaṃ brāhmaṇā cātuvaṇṇisuddhīti vadanti, ettha cātuvaṇṇāti niyamo natthi. Pañcamo hi pādasikavaṇṇopi atthīti saṃkhittena tesaṃ vāde dosadassanatthaṃ idha khattiyakumārotiādimāha. Tatra amutra ca panesānanti amusmiñca pana purimanaye etesaṃ māṇavakānaṃ kiñci nānākaraṇaṃ na passāmīti vadati. Nānākaraṇaṃ pana tesampi atthiyeva. Khattiyakumārassa hi brāhmaṇakaññāya uppanno khattiyapādasiko nāma, itaro brāhmaṇapādasiko nāma, ete hīnajātimāṇavakā.
如此,通过指出第五种姓的存在,揭示他们“四姓清净”论的过失之后,现在为进一步教示四姓清净的问题,经文又提出“你意如何”等问。其中,“以净信”指为亡者备办的饭食;“以满盘食”指作为礼物的饭食;“以祭祀”指祭祀时的饭食;“以待客”指为来宾备办的饭食。“什么利益”意为:这样做会有大果报吗?还是没有呢?这便是所要阐明的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pañcamassa vaṇṇassa atthitāya cātuvaṇṇisuddhīti etesaṃ vāde dosaṃ dassetvā idāni puna cātuvaṇṇisuddhiyaṃ ovadanto taṃ kiṃ maññasītiādimāha. Tattha saddheti matakabhatte. Thālipāketi paṇṇākārabhatte. Yaññeti yaññabhatte. Pāhuneti āgantukānaṃ katabhatte. Kiṃ hīti kiṃ mahapphalaṃ bhavissati, no bhavissatīti dīpeti.
410 “过去”(bhūtapubbaṃ):阿摄惒啊,从前你们的出身较我更卑劣,你们却自以为殊胜,那时被我以出身论发问,尚且无法圆满作答;如今,你们变得更为低劣,而被诸佛中最胜的我问及同样的出身论题,又怎能答得出呢?不必在此犹豫——为了鼓励这位年轻人,世尊开始了这段开示。在这当中,“阿西多”意为“黑色的”,即黑尊者;“德瓦罗”是他的名字,他正是当时的世尊。“波吒利”指牛群涉水的渡口,“波坦迪勒”指叶寺的僧房。“是谁?究竟在哪里?”意思是如同村童般无知。而“我就是,尊者”即是他所说:“尊者,我就是阿西多·德瓦罗。”据说那时大菩萨化身为恭达达摩,正在游化。“他们开始礼拜”指他们开始行礼敬。从那时起,即便是修苦行百年的沙门,若不向当天出生的婆罗门男孩敬礼,便会成为一个有过失的人(恭达)。显示巴利原文
410.Bhūtapubbanti assalāyana pubbe mayi jātiyā hīnatare tumhe seṭṭhatarā samānāpi mayā jātivāde pañhaṃ puṭṭhā sampādetuṃ na sakkhittha, idāni tumhe hīnatarā hutvā mayā seṭṭhatarena buddhānaṃ sake jātivādapañhaṃ puṭṭhā kiṃ sampādessatha? Na ettha cintā kātabbāti māṇavaṃ upatthambhento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha asitoti kāḷako. Devaloti tassa nāmaṃ, ayameva bhagavā tena samayena. Paṭaliyoti gaṇaṅgaṇupāhanā. Patthaṇḍileti paṇṇasālapariveṇe. Ko nu khoti kahaṃ nu kho. Gāmaṇḍalarūpo viyāti gāmadārakarūpo viya. So khvāhaṃ, bho, homīti so ahaṃ, bho, asitadevalo homīti vadati. Tadā kira mahāsatto koṇḍadamako hutvā vicarati. Abhivādetuṃ upakkamiṃsūti vandituṃ upakkamaṃ akaṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya ca vassasatikatāpasopi tadahujātaṃ brāhmaṇakumāraṃ avandanto koṇḍito hoti.
411 “生母”(janikā mātā)指生育你们的人,即你们的亲生母亲。“生母的母亲”(janikā mātu)指生母的母亲。“生父”(yo janako)指生育你们的父亲。另有一种读法是“生父即父亲”(yo janiko pitāteva)。显示巴利原文
411.Janikā mātāti yāya tumhe janitā, sā vo janikā mātā. Janikāmātūti janikāya mātu. Yo janakoti yo janako pitā. ‘‘Yo janiko pitāteva’’ vā pāṭho.
“被阿西多”(asitena):意即被具足五神通的阿西多·提瓦罗仙人问及这乾闼婆的问题,他们仍无法圆满解答。“那些”(yesaṃ)指那七位仙人。“斟斗者普那并非”(na puṇṇo dabbigāho):在那七位仙人中,有一位名叫普那的施主,他手持勺子,煮好树叶布施他人,且精通斟斗的技巧。你连同你的老师,连那位普那都不如,因而于斟斗技巧一窍不通。其余各处,意义浅显明白。显示巴利原文
Asitenāti pañcābhiññena asitena devalena isinā imaṃ gandhabbapañhaṃ puṭṭhā na sampāyissanti. Yesanti yesaṃ sattannaṃ isīnaṃ. Na puṇṇo dabbigāhoti tesaṃ sattannaṃ isīnaṃ dabbiṃ gahetvā paṇṇaṃ pacitvā dāyako puṇṇo nāma eko ahosi, so dabbigahaṇasippaṃ jānāti. Tvaṃ sācariyako tesaṃ puṇṇopi na hoti, tena ñātaṃ dabbigahaṇasippamattampi na jānāsīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
然而,这位阿摄惒具足净信,心极明净,他在自己的住所内建造了一座塔庙。从此以后,凡是生于阿摄惒家族的人,在建造住宅时,都会在屋内建造塔庙。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana assalāyano saddho ahosi pasanno, attano antonivesaneyeva cetiyaṃ kāresi. Yāvajjadivasā assalāyanavaṃse jātā nivesanaṃ kāretvā antonivesane cetiyaṃ karontevāti.
4. 《瞿哆牟佉经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Ghoṭamukhasuttavaṇṇanā
412 “如是我闻”等,即《瞿哆牟佉经》。其中,“于安稳芒果园”是指在一个名为安稳的芒果园里。“法游行者”意为如法的出家。“无见”指由于未曾见到像您这样的智者,或者“这里所说的法”指真实的法,即由于未曾见到此法。以此表明:“我们的话不足为准绳,法才是准绳。”接着上座心想:“这里应如在新布萨堂那样,有许多事要做。”于是他从经行处下来,进入叶屋坐下。为了说明此事,才说了“如是我闻”等开篇之语。显示巴利原文
412.Evaṃme sutanti ghoṭamukhasuttaṃ. Tattha khemiyambavaneti evaṃnāmake ambavane. Dhammiko paribbajoti dhammikā pabbajjā. Adassanāti tumhādisānaṃ vā paṇḍitānaṃ adassanena. Yo vā panettha dhammoti yo vā pana ettha dhammo sabhāvo, tasseva vā adassanena. Iminā ‘‘amhākaṃ kathā appamāṇaṃ, dhammova pamāṇa’’nti dasseti. Tato thero ‘‘navauposathāgāre viya bahunā kammena idha bhavitabba’’nti cintetvā caṅkamā oruyha paṇṇasālaṃ pavisitvā nisīdi. Taṃ dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttetiādi vuttaṃ.
413 “有四种婆罗门”——相传,上座当时心想:“这位婆罗门声称:‘依止如法出家的沙门或婆罗门并不存在。’我将为他指出四种补特伽罗和两类众,然后问他:‘你常见第四种补特伽罗大多在哪一类众中?’他若明白,便会答道:‘在出家众中。’这样就能让他亲口说出:‘如法的游行者是存在的。’”于是便开始了这次开示。显示巴利原文
413.Cattārome brāhmaṇāti therassa kira etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo ‘dhammikaṃ pabbajjaṃ upagato samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā natthī’ti vadati. Imassa cattāro puggale dve ca parisā dassetvā ‘catutthaṃ puggalaṃ katarāya parisāya bahulaṃ passasī’ti pucchissāmi, jānamāno ‘anāgāriyaparisāya’nti vakkhati. Evametaṃ sakamukheneva ‘dhammiko paribbajo atthī’ti vadāpessāmī’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
414 其中,“深为喜悦”(sārattarattā):指极为喜悦。“说其有据之言”(sānuggahā vācā bhāsitā):指说出有理由的话。对此,我也说过:“我们的话不足为量,法才是量。”显示巴利原文
414. Tattha sārattarattāti suṭṭhu rattarattā. Sānuggahā vācā bhāsitā sakāraṇā vācā bhāsitā. Vuttañhetaṃ mayā ‘‘amhākaṃ kathā appamāṇaṃ, dhammova pamāṇa’’nti.
421 “那么你呢?”(Kiṃ pana te)——为分辨在家人是否也会说出如法或不如法的话而问。“令造”(Kārāpesīti):即令建造。他令建造后,命终生到天界。据说,懂得那种暗杀技艺的人,会杀害父母,然后自杀。除了懂得此技艺者,无人能生天界;而这人是依靠长老的功德而生到那里。生到那里后,他思惟:“我是以何业而生于此?”如实了知后,有一天,为了修缮破旧的食堂,当比丘僧团集会时,他变化成人形前来问道:“尊者,僧团为何集会?”“为修缮食堂。”“这食堂是谁建造的?”“是瞿哆牟佉。”“他现在在哪里?”“已经命终。”“他有亲属吗?”“有一位姊妹。”“请将她带来。”比丘们便把她带来。他走到她面前说:“我是你的兄弟瞿哆牟佉,建造此食堂后生到天界。我在某处存放了财物,你去取来,用以继续建造这间食堂,并抚养孩子们。”说完,他顶礼比丘僧团,腾空返回天界。其余各处内容皆易解。显示巴利原文
421.Kiṃ pana teti gihi nāma kappiyampi akappiyampi vadeyyāti vivecanatthaṃ pucchi. Kārāpesīti māpesi. Kārāpetvā ca pana kālaṃ katvā sagge nibbatto. Etassa kira jānanasippe mātarampi pitarampi ghātetvā attāva ghātetabboti āgacchati. Etaṃ sippaṃ jānanto ṭhapetvā etaṃ añño sagge nibbatto nāma natthi, esa pana theraṃ upanissāya puññaṃ katvā tattha nibbattitvā ca pana ‘‘kenāhaṃ kammena idha nibbatto’’ti āvajjetvā yathābhūtaṃ ñatvā ekadivasaṃ jiṇṇāya bhojanasālāya paṭisaṅkharaṇatthaṃ saṅghe sannipatite manussavesena āgantvā pucchi – ‘‘kimatthaṃ, bhante, saṅgho sannipatito’’ti? Bhojanasālāya paṭisaṅkharaṇatthanti. Kenesā kāritāti? Ghoṭamukhenāti. Idāni so kuhinti? Kālaṅkatoti. Atthi panassa koci ñātakoti? Atthi ekā bhaginīti. Pakkosāpetha nanti. Bhikkhū pakkosāpesuṃ. So taṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘ahaṃ, tava bhātā, ghoṭamukho nāma imaṃ sālaṃ kāretvā sagge nibbatto, asuke ca asuke ca ṭhāne mayā ṭhapitaṃ dhanaṃ atthi, taṃ gahetvā imañca bhojanasālaṃ kārehi, dārake ca posehī’’ti vatvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vanditvā vehāsaṃ uppatitvā devalokameva agamāsi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
5. 《香克经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Caṅkīsuttavaṇṇanā
422 “如是我闻”等,这就是《香克经》。其中,“天林沙罗树林”(devavane sālavane):据说在那里为天神作祭祀,因此既称“天林”,也称“沙罗树林”。“居住在欧帕萨达”(Opāsādaṃ ajjhāvasati):指住在名为欧帕萨达的婆罗门村落;或解作“征服后而住”,即成为该地主人,依应守的界限居住。然而此处,由于前缀的含义,应将受用格理解为表示处于陆地之义,因为后续用词亦顺应此义。关于此点,应从音韵学(声论)中寻求依据。“众生充溢”(Sattussadaṃ):指被众生充满,即人口众多、拥挤,充满人与牛、象、马、鹿等种种众生。然而,因为该村之外生长的草料足以供给象、马等食用,盖屋的茅草极为充足,木料与建筑材料也十分丰足;又因村内有众多圆形、方形等形状的池塘,村外有众多点缀着水生花卉的湖泊,水常满盈,因此说“有草、有木、有水”。显示巴利原文
422.Evaṃme sutanti caṅkīsuttaṃ. Tattha devavane sālavaneti tasmiṃ kira devatānaṃ balikammaṃ karīyati, tena taṃ devavanantipi sālavanantipi vuccati. Opāsādaṃ ajjhāvasatīti opāsādanāmake brāhmaṇagāme vasati, abhibhavitvā vā āvasati, tassa sāmī hutvā yāya mariyādāya tattha vasitabbaṃ, tāya mariyādāya vasati. Upasaggavasena panettha bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ, tathassa anuppayogattāva sesapadesu. Tattha lakkhaṇaṃ saddasatthato pariyesitabbaṃ. Sattussadanti sattehi ussadaṃ ussannaṃ, bahujanaṃ ākiṇṇamanussaṃ posāvaniyahatthiassamoramigādianekasattasamākiṇṇañcāti attho. Yasmā pana so gāmo bahi āvijjhitvā jātena hatthiassādīnaṃ ghāsatiṇena ceva gehacchadanatiṇena ca sampanno, tathā dārukaṭṭhehi ceva gehasambhārakaṭṭhehi ca, yasmā cassa abbhantare vaṭṭacaturassādisaṇṭhānā bahū pokkharaṇiyo, jalajakusumavicittāni ca bahi anekāni taḷākāni vā udakassa niccabharitāneva honti, tasmā satiṇakaṭṭhodakanti vuttaṃ.
“与谷物一起”是指与谷物一起,即初熟谷物、后熟谷物等种类的大量谷物堆积。至此,在那个村落中,婆罗门撑起白伞,享有国王般的威仪,这便昭示了他的富足圆满。“王受用物”是指从国王那里得到、可以享用的田产。若问是谁所赐?那是憍萨罗国波斯匿王所赐。“王所施”意为国王的赠物,即遗产。“梵施”指最殊胜的布施,意思是撑起白伞,以国王的简要方式受用。或者,“王受用物”也可解释为:行使一切生杀大权,在山林、渡口等处征收关税,撑起白伞,如同国王般受用。其中,由憍萨罗国波斯匿王所赐的,便称为“王所施”。这里,因为是由国王所赐,所以称为‘王施物’;而为了指明施主是国王,故说‘由憍萨罗国波斯匿王所赐’。“梵施”是指最殊胜的布施,意思是如同已经彻底给出、不再收回,完全舍弃、出离地赐予。显示巴利原文
Saha dhaññena sadhaññaṃ, pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇādibhedaṃ bahudhaññasannicayanti attho. Ettāvatā yasmiṃ gāme brāhmaṇo setacchattaṃ ussāpetvā rājalīlāya vasati. Tassa samiddhisampatti dīpitā hoti. Rājato laddhaṃ bhoggaṃ rājabhoggaṃ. Kena dinnanti ce, raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṃ. Rājadāyanti rañño dāyabhūtaṃ, dāyajjanti attho. Brahmadeyyanti seṭṭhadeyyaṃ, chattaṃ ussāpetvā rājasaṅkhepena bhuñjitabbanti attho. Atha vā rājabhogganti sabbaṃ chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsantena titthapabbatādīsu suṅkaṃ gaṇhantena setacchattaṃ ussāpetvā raññā hutvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Tattha raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṃ rājadāyanti. Ettha raññā dinnattā rājadāyaṃ, dāyakarājadīpanatthaṃ panassa ‘‘raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinna’’nti idaṃ vuttaṃ. Brahmadeyyanti seṭṭhadeyyaṃ, yathā dinnaṃ na puna gahetabbaṃ hoti nissaṭṭhapariccattaṃ, evaṃ dinnanti attho.
423 “众多、众多地聚集在一起”,故称为“众”。每一方向都各有其团体,故称为“有众的”。先前在村内未被计入,出村后各团体具足圆满,故称为“成为众的”。“Uttarenamukhā”意为面向北方。“Khattaṃ āmantesī”:“khatta”是指能解答所问的大臣,他召唤了这位大臣。“Āgamentū”:请稍待片刻,即“请停留一下”。显示巴利原文
423. Bahū bahū hutvā saṃhatāti saṅghā. Ekekissā disāya saṅgho tesaṃ atthīti saṅghī. Pubbe gāmassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇā sampannāti gaṇībhūtā. Uttarenamukhāti uttaradisābhimukhā. Khattaṃ āmantesīti khattā vuccati pucchitapañhabyākaraṇasamattho mahāmatto, taṃ āmantesi. Āgamentūti muhuttaṃ paṭimānentu, acchantūti vuttaṃ hoti.
424 “种种异域之人”:指在种种不同的国土——如迦尸、憍萨罗等——出生、居住,或从彼处而来的人,称为“种种异域者”。“因某一事务”:指因某件不确定的事情,如祭祀、供养等。他们听到了商吉要去见世尊的消息,心里想:“这位商吉是出身高贵的婆罗门,而其他大多数婆罗门都已经皈依了沙门乔达摩,唯独他还没有去。现在他要是去了那里,必定会被沙门乔达摩那种能吸引人的幻术所迷惑,从而皈依。这样一来,在他家门口,婆罗门们将不再集会。来,我们为他的前往制造障碍吧。”他们如此商议后,便去了那里。关于此事,经文接着说“Atha kho te brāhmaṇā”等。显示巴利原文
424.Nānāverajjakānanti nānāvidhesu rajjesu aññesu kāsikosalādīsu jātā vā nivasanti vā, tato vā āgatāti nānāverajjakā, tesaṃ nānāverajjakānaṃ. Kenacidevāti aniyamitena yaññupāsanādinā kenaci kiccena. Te tassa gamanaṃ sutvā cintesuṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ, caṅkī, uggatabrāhmaṇo, yebhuyyena ca aññe brāhmaṇā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā, ayameva na gato. Svāyaṃ sace tattha gamissati, addhā samaṇassa gotamassa āvaṭṭaniyā māyāya āvaṭṭito saraṇaṃ gamissati. Tato etassāpi gehadvāre brāhmaṇānaṃ asannipāto bhavissati. Handassa gamanantarāyaṃ karomā’’ti sammantayitvā tattha agamaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘atha kho te brāhmaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,“ubhato”指从母系与父系两个方面。“Mātito ca pitito ca”即:尊者的母亲是婆罗门女,母亲的母亲是婆罗门女,乃至她的母亲也是婆罗门女;父亲是婆罗门,父亲的父亲是婆罗门,乃至他的父亲也是婆罗门。如此,尊者从母系和父系两方面,皆是“从两方面善生”。“Saṃsuddhagahaṇiko”意为“清净受胎”,即:你的母亲受胎清净,你母亲的子宫清净。“Yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā”意为“上至七代祖父辈”:此处,父亲的父亲称为祖父,祖父的一代则称为祖父辈。这仅是一种名义上的称谓,实际意义上,“祖父”即指祖父辈。由此上溯,所有先祖都含摄于“祖父”这一称呼之中。如是,上至第七代先人,皆是清净受胎者;或者,这也显示出他“不被指责、不被贬损”的出身论。“Akkhitto”指“未被指责”:即“除去此事,以此何用?”如此这般,不被指责、不被贬斥。“Anupakkuṭṭho”……显示巴利原文
Tattha ubhatoti dvīhi pakkhehi. Mātitoca pitito cāti, bhoto mātā brāhmaṇī, mātumātā brāhmaṇī, tassāpi mātā brāhmaṇī. Pitā brāhmaṇo, pitupitā brāhmaṇo, tassapi pitā brāhmaṇoti. Evaṃ bhavaṃ ubhato sujāto, mātito ca pitito ca. Saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti saṃsuddhā te mātu gahaṇī, saṃsuddhā te mātu kucchīti attho. Yāva sattamā pitāmahayugāti ettha pitu pitā pitāmaho, pitāmahassa yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ. Yuganti āyuppamāṇaṃ vuccati. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahova pitāmahayugaṃ. Tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo puriso, tāva saṃsuddhagahaṇiko. Atha vā akkhitto anupakuṭṭho jātivādenāti dasseti. Akkhittoti apanetha etaṃ, kiṃ imināti evaṃ akkhitto anavakkhitto. Anupakkuṭṭhoti na upakuṭṭho, na akkosaṃ vā nindaṃ vā pattapubbo. Kena kāraṇenāti. Jātivādena, itipi hīnajātiko esoti evarūpena vacanenāti attho. Imināpaṅgenāti imināpi kāraṇena.
“Aḍḍho”指富有者,即富足自在者。“Mahaddhano”指大财富者:拥有巨量财富。他们如此说,意在显示:在尊者的家中,财富如同地上的尘土一般繁多,而沙门乔达摩却身无分文,唯以乞食果腹度日。“Mahābhogo”指大受用者:凭借五种欲乐功德而享有广大受用。他们这样讲,是认为在赞叹自己每一种功德时,便能反衬出世尊的功德缺失。显示巴利原文
Aḍḍhoti issaro. Mahaddhanoti mahatā dhanena samannāgato. Bhoto hi gehe pathaviyaṃ paṃsuvālikā viya bahu dhanaṃ, samaṇo pana gotamo adhano bhikkhāya udaraṃ pūretvā yāpetīti dassenti . Mahābhogoti pañcakāmaguṇavasena mahāupabhogo. Evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ guṇaṃ vadanti, tassa tassa paṭipakkhavasena bhagavato aguṇaṃyeva dassemāti maññamānā vadanti.
“Abhirūpo”指端正:相较于他人,容貌更为优胜。“Dassanīyo”指可观:即使整日观看也不会感到餍足,因此值得瞻仰;又因仅凭瞻仰便能使心生起净信,故而称为“令人心生明净”。“Pokkharatā”指美好的状态,“vaṇṇassa pokkharatā”即“容貌之美”;以此容貌之美,也就是以色身成就的意思。然而古师有言:“pokkharaṃ”指身体,“vaṇṇa”指肤色。依其见解,肤色与身体合称为“vaṇṇapokkharāni”,其状态便是“vaṇṇapokkharatā”。如此一来,“paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya”即“具有极殊胜的容貌之美”,意指拥有最为清净的肤色与身体形态的圆满成就。“Brahmavaṇṇī”意为“梵天色”:指最殊胜的肤色,即在清净肤色中拥有最极的金色。“Brahmavacchasī”意为“梵身者”:拥有与大梵天相类之身。“Akhuddāvakāso dassanāya”:他令人观无厌足……显示巴利原文
Abhirūpoti aññehi manussehi adhikarūpo. Dassanīyoti divasampi passantānaṃ atittikaraṇato dassanayoggo, dassaneneva cittapasādajananato pāsādiko. Pokkharatā vuccati sundarabhāvo, vaṇṇassa pokkharatā vaṇṇapokkharatā, tāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya, vaṇṇasampattiyāti attho. Porāṇā pana pokkharanti sarīraṃ vadanti, vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇameva. Tesaṃ matena vaṇṇo ca pokkharañca vaṇṇapokkharāni, tesaṃ bhāvo vaṇṇapokkharatā. Iti paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti uttamaparisuddhena vaṇṇena ceva sarīrasaṇṭhānasampattiyā cāti attho. Brahmavaṇṇīti seṭṭhavaṇṇī, parisuddhavaṇṇesupi seṭṭhena suvaṇṇavaṇṇeneva samannāgatoti attho. Brahmavacchasīti mahābrahmuno sarīrasadisena sarīrena samannāgato. Akhuddāvakāso dassanāyāti bhoto sarīre dassanassa okāso na khuddako mahā. Sabbāneva te aṅgapaccaṅgāni dassanīyāneva, tāni cāpi mahantānevāti dīpeti.
“他有戒”,因此称为“具戒者”。他的戒增长与增广,所以称为“增上戒者”。“以增上戒”意为以增长、增广的戒。“具足”即具备,这也是“增上戒者”的同义词。他们所说的这一切,实际上都是仅就五戒而言。显示巴利原文
Sīlamassa atthīti sīlavā. Vuddhaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ sīlamassāti vuddhasīlī. Vuddhasīlenāti vuddhena vaḍḍhitena sīlena. Samannāgatoti yutto, idaṃ vuddhasīlīpadasseva vevacanaṃ. Sabbametaṃ pañcasīlamattameva sandhāya vadanti.
在“言辞美妙”等词中:“言辞美妙”指他拥有美好、圆满的语句,所以称为言辞美妙者。“言辞悦耳”指他拥有甜美悦耳的声音。“声音”即发出的音声。因为功德圆满而称为“优雅”,亦即高贵;或者因为它如同都市女子那般娇柔,所以称为优雅。以这种优雅的言语,即“流利无碍”,指没有障碍,远离了结巴、迟疑等过失。“无唾液滴沥”是远离了“唾液滴沥”。有些人说话时,口水会流出来,或者淌涎,或者喷出唾沫星子,这种人的话语就叫作“有唾液滴沥”。这里是指与此相反,没有这些过失。“能令理解义理”指能够清晰地解说所说内容的前、中、后各部分义理。此处其余关于婆罗门相貌的描述,都是显而易见的。显示巴利原文
Kālyāṇavācotiādīsu kalyāṇā sundarā parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā vācā assāti kalyāṇavāco. Kalyāṇaṃ madhuraṃ vākkaraṇaṃ assāti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Vākkaraṇanti udāharaṇaghoso. Guṇaparipuṇṇabhāvena pure bhavāti porī. Pure vā bhavattā porī. Nāgarikitthiyā sukhumālattanena sadisātipi porī. Tāya poriyā. Vissaṭṭhāyāti apalibuddhāya, sandiṭṭhavilambitādidosarahitāya. Anelagalāyāti elagalena virahitāya. Ekaccassa hi kathentassa elaṃ galati, lālā vā paggharati, kheḷaphusitāni vā nikkhamanti, tassa vācā elagalā nāma hoti. Tabbiparitāyāti attho. Atthassa viññāpaniyātiādimajjhapariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā bhāsitatthassa viññāpanasamatthāya. Sesamettha brāhmaṇavaṇṇe uttānameva.
425 “在如此说时”:当那些婆罗门这样说了之后,商吉心想:“这些婆罗门在听到称赞自己的功德时,没有一个人会不欢喜。他们称赞我的出身等功德,是想先赞美我,然后阻止我。然而,我沉迷于自己的功德实在不合适。让我来打破他们的话头,告诉他们沙门乔达摩的伟大之处,从而让他们能够前往他那里。”这样思考后,他说:“那么,诸位,也请听听我(的功德)。”对于他们所说的那些诸如“从两方面善生”等与他自己功德相当的功德,他也心想:“我算什么,沙门乔达摩的出身成就等功德又算什么”,认为自己的功德远为更胜。而其他的那些话,纯粹是为了彰显世尊的殊胜伟大。此处,“我们才配”这样确定地说,是想说明:“如果因为功德伟大而应该去亲近,那么,就像把芥子放在须弥山旁边,把牛蹄印里的水放在大海旁边,把草尖的露珠放在七大湖的水旁边,显得微小、低劣一样,我们的功德与沙门乔达摩的出身成就等功德相比,也是微小、低劣的。因此,我们才配去亲近那位尊者乔达摩,为了一睹他的容颜。”显示巴利原文
425.Evaṃvutteti evaṃ tehi brāhmaṇehi vutte, caṅkī, ‘‘ime brāhmaṇā attano vaṇṇe vuccamāne atussanakasatto nāma natthi, vaṇṇamassa bhaṇitvā nivāressāmāti jātiādīhi mama vaṇṇaṃ vadanti, na kho pana me yuttaṃ attano vaṇṇe rajjituṃ. Handāhaṃ etesaṃ vādaṃ bhinditvā samaṇassa gotamassa mahantabhāvaṃ ñāpetvā etesaṃ tattha gamanaṃ karomī’’ti cintetvā tena hi, bho, mamāpi suṇāthātiādimāha. Tattha yepi ‘‘ubhato sujāto’’tiādayo attano guṇehi sadisā guṇā, tepi ‘‘ko cāhaṃ, ke ca samaṇassa gotamassa jātisampattiādayo guṇā’’ti attano guṇehi uttaritareyeva maññamāno, itare pana ekanteneva bhagavato mahantabhāvadīpanatthaṃ pakāseti. Mayameva arahāmāti evaṃ niyamento cettha idaṃ dīpeti – yadi guṇamahantatāya upasaṅkamitabbo nāma hoti, yathā sineruṃ upanidhāya sāsapo, mahāsamuddaṃ upanidhāya gopadakaṃ, sattasu mahāsaresu udakaṃ upanidhāya ussāvabindu paritto lāmako, evamevaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa jātisampattiādayo guṇe upanidhāya amhākaṃ guṇā parittā lāmakā, tasmā mayameva arahāma taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamitunti.
“藏于地下与置于空中”:在宫院与御苑中,用石灰抹平的池子里,将七宝装满后埋入地下的财富,称为“地下之财”;而装满宫殿尖顶等高处并安放的财富,称为“空中之财”。这是依世间家族传承来说的。然而,对于如来,在他诞生之日,便有螺宝、青宝、黄宝、白宝这四种宝藏出现。其中,螺宝藏方圆一牛呼,青宝藏半由旬,黄宝藏三牛呼,白宝藏一由旬。这些宝藏所在之处,不论取走多少,都会重新充满。应当知道,世尊正是舍弃了如此众多的金银财宝而出家的。至于“年轻”等词,前文已作详细解释。显示巴利原文
Bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhañcāti ettha rājaṅgaṇe ceva uyyāne ca sudhāmaṭṭhā pokkharaṇiyo sattaratanapūriṃ katvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitaṃ dhanaṃ bhūmigataṃ nāma, pāsādaniyūhādayo pana pūretvā ṭhapitaṃ vehāsaṭṭhaṃ nāma. Evaṃ tāva kulapariyāyena āgataṃ. Tathāgatassa pana jātadivaseyeva saṅkho elo uppalo puṇḍarīkoti cattāro nidhayo upagatā. Tesu saṅkho gāvutiko, elo aḍḍhayojaniko, uppalo tigāvutiko puṇḍarīko yojanikoti. Tesupi gahitagahitaṭṭhānaṃ pūratiyeva. Iti bhagavā pahūtaṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ ohāya pabbajitoti veditabbo. Daharo vātiādīni heṭṭhā vitthāritāneva.
“观看之处不小”:在这里应当知道,对于世尊,见佛的空间其实不可限量。有这样一件事例:据说在王舍城,有一位婆罗门听说“沙门乔达摩的身量无法测量”,便在世尊入城乞食时,拿着一根六十肘长的竹竿,站在城门外面。当世尊到来时,他举起竹竿靠近站立,竹竿仅够到世尊的膝处。第二天,他把两根竹竿接在一起,靠近站立,而世尊却显得比这两根竹竿相加还要高出两竿。世尊问:“婆罗门,你在做什么?”他回答:“我在量您的身高。”世尊说:“婆罗门,即使你取来竹子填满整个轮围世界,把它们接成一根竹竿,也永远无法量出我的身量。我曾在四不可计劫和十万劫中修习波罗蜜,并不是为了让别人能够测量我的身量。婆罗门,如来无与伦比,不可测量。”说完,便诵出《法句》中的一偈。偈颂结束时,八万四千众生得饮不死甘露。显示巴利原文
Akhuddāvakāsoti ettha bhagavati aparimāṇoyeva dassanāvakāsoti veditabbo. Tatridaṃ vatthuṃ – rājagahe kira aññataro brāhmaṇo ‘‘samaṇassa kira gotamassa pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkā’’ti sutvā bhagavato piṇḍāya pavisanakāle saṭṭhihatthaṃ veḷuṃ gahetvā nagaradvārassa bahi ṭhatvā sampatte bhagavati veḷuṃ gahetvā samīpe aṭṭhāsi, veḷu bhagavato jāṇumattaṃ pāpuṇi. Punadivase dve veḷū ghaṭetvā samīpe aṭṭhāsi , bhagavā dvinnaṃ veḷūnaṃ upari dviveṇumattameva paññāyamāno, ‘‘brāhmaṇa, kiṃ karosī’’ti āha? Tumhākaṃ pamāṇaṃ gaṇhāmīti. ‘‘Brāhmaṇa, sacepi tvaṃ sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pūretvā ṭhitaveḷuṃ ghaṭetvā āgamissasi, neva me pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ sakkhissasi. Na hi mayā cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca tathā pāramiyo pūritā, yathā me paro pamāṇaṃ gaṇheyya, atulo brāhmaṇa, tathāgato appameyyo’’ti vatvā dhammapade gāthamāha. Gāthāpariyosāne caturāsītipāṇasahassāni amataṃ piviṃsu.
又有一则事例:据说,阿修罗王罗睺身高四千八百由旬,两臂之间宽一千二百由旬,手掌和脚掌的宽度为三百由旬,手指节长五十由旬,眉间宽五十由旬,额头三百由旬,头九百由旬。他心想:“我如此高大,若要低下头来瞻仰世尊,我难以做到。”因此不来见佛。后来有一天,他听闻世尊的功德,心想“无论如何我也要去看一看”,于是便来了。世尊知道了他的心念,便思惟:“在行、住、坐、卧四种威仪中,我应当用哪一种来示现呢?”接着又想:“站着的时候,即使矮小的人也显得高大,我就卧着让他瞻仰吧。”于是说道:“阿难,在香室旁廊铺好床。”随后便在那里作狮子卧。罗睺到来,仰起脖子望向躺卧的世尊,犹如仰观天空中央的满月。当被问及“阿修罗王,这是为何?”时,世尊说:“阿修罗王,我并非因为不能低头看你才避而不见。我的波罗蜜不是低着头修成的,我是昂着头行布施的。”就在那一天,罗睺皈依了。如此,对于见佛,世尊是无所障碍、随时相应的。显示巴利原文
Aparampi vatthu – rāhu kira asurindo cattāri yojanasahassāni aṭṭha ca yojanasatāni ucco, bāhantaramassa dvādasayojanasatāni, hatthatalapādatalānaṃ puthulatā tīṇi yojanasatāni, aṅgulipabbāni paṇṇāsayojanāni , bhamukantaraṃ paṇṇāsayojanaṃ, nalāṭaṃ tiyojanasataṃ, sīsaṃ navayojanasataṃ. So – ‘‘ahaṃ uccosmi, satthāraṃ onamitvā oloketuṃ na sakkhissāmī’’ti na gacchati. So ekadivasaṃ bhagavato vaṇṇaṃ sutvā ‘‘yathā kathañca olokessāmī’’ti āgato. Bhagavā tassa ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā ‘‘catūsu iriyāpathesu katarena dassemī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘ṭhitako nāma nīcopi ucco viya paññāyati, nipannovassa attānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti, ‘‘ānanda, gandhakuṭipariveṇe mañcakaṃ paññāpehī’’ti vatvā tattha sīhaseyyaṃ kappesi. Rāhu āgantvā nipannaṃ bhagavantaṃ gīvaṃ unnāmetvā nabhamajjhe puṇṇacandaṃ viya ulloketi. Kimidaṃ asurindāti ca vutte, bhagavā onamitvā oloketuṃ na sakkhissāmīti na gacchinti. Na mayā asurinda adhomukhena pāramiyo pūritā, uddhaggaṃ me katvā dānaṃ dinnanti. Taṃdivasaṃ rāhu saraṇaṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ bhagavā akhuddāvakāso dassanāya.
他以四遍清净戒而成为具戒者。此戒是圣洁、殊胜、清净的,因此称“圣戒者”。又从无过失的意义上说,是善的,故称“善戒者”。“由善戒所成”是其同义语。他是众多老师的老师:世尊每一次说法,便有八万四千乃至无量的诸天与人畅饮道果甘露。因此,他既是众多人之师,对于声闻弟子及应受教化者而言,更是师公。显示巴利原文
Catupārisuddhisīlena sīlavā. Taṃ pana sīlaṃ ariyaṃ uttamaṃ parisuddhaṃ, tenāha ariyasīlīti. Tadeva anavajjaṭṭhena kusalaṃ, tenāha kusalasīlīti. Kusalena sīlenāti idamassa vevacanaṃ. Bahūnaṃ ācariyapācariyoti bhagavato ekekāya dhammadesanāya caturāsītipāṇasahassāni aparimāṇāpi devamanussā maggaphalāmataṃ pivanti. Tasmā bahūnaṃ ācariyo, sāvakavineyyānaṃ pācariyoti.
“灭尽欲贪”:在此,虽然世尊的一切烦恼都已灭尽,但这婆罗门并不知悉,他只是在自己所能了知的范围内称赞功德。“远离散漫”:即远离了诸如“装饰钵、装饰袈裟、装饰坐卧具,或为这臭皮囊……嬉戏、互相戏弄”等被称为散漫的行为。显示巴利原文
Khīṇakāmarāgoti ettha kāmaṃ bhagavato sabbepi kilesā khīṇā, brāhmaṇo pana te na jānāti, attano jānanaṭṭhāneyeva guṇaṃ katheti. Vigatacāpalloti ‘‘pattamaṇḍanā cīvaramaṇḍanā senāsanamaṇḍanā imassa vā pūtikāyassa…pe… kelanā paṭikelanā’’ti evaṃ vuttacāpalyavirahito.
“不以恶为首”:即不以恶事为首要,不将恶事置于前而行,不希求恶事。对婆罗门众而言,此指以舍利弗、目犍连、大迦叶等为代表的婆罗门大众,他为这一大众所尊奉。意思是说,这一大众以沙门乔达摩为前导而行事。又一种解释,“不以恶为首”是指以非恶的九种出世间法为前导而生活。这是针对谁说的?针对婆罗门众:即使对于与自己有敌意的婆罗门众,他也不与他们对立,唯愿他们获得利益与安乐。这便是所说的意思。显示巴利原文
Apāpapurekkhāroti apāpe navalokuttaradhamme purato katvā vicarati. Brahmaññāya pajāyāti sāriputtamoggallānamahākassapādibhedāya brāhmaṇapajāya. (Aviruddho hi so) etissāya pajāya purekkhāro. Ayañhi pajā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ purato katvā caratīti attho. Apica apāpapurekkhāroti na pāpupurekkhāro, na pāpaṃ purato katvā carati, pāpaṃ na icchatīti attho. Kassa? Brahmaññāya pajāya attanā saddhiṃ paṭiviruddhāyapi brāhmaṇapajāya aviruddho hitasukhatthikoyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Tiroraṭṭhā”意指从他国而来。“Tirojanapadā”意指从他方而来。“前来请问”:刹帝利智者等,以及婆罗门、乾闼婆等,备好问题欲来请问。在他们之中,有些人观察到提问可能有过失,或觉察到无人能胜任解答,便不提问而默然静坐;有些人则提问。对于有些人,世尊先策励其提问之勇气,而后解答。如是,他们一切疑惑,犹如大海波澜,一遇世尊便皆粉碎。其余如来功德,其义于此分明可见。显示巴利原文
Tiroraṭṭhāti pararaṭṭhato. Tirojanapadāti parajanapadato. Saṃpucchituṃ āgacchantīti khattiyapaṇḍitādayo ceva brāhmaṇagandhabbādayo ca pañhe abhisaṅkharitvā pucchissāmāti āgacchanti. Tattha keci pucchāya vā dosaṃ vissajjanasampaṭicchane vā asamatthataṃ sallakkhetvā apucchitvāva tuṇhī nisīdanti, keci pucchanti, kesañci bhagavā pucchāya ussāhaṃ janetvā vissajjeti. Evaṃ sabbesampi tesaṃ vimatiyo tīraṃ patvā mahāsamuddassa ūmiyo viya bhagavantaṃ patvāva bhijjanti. Sesamettha tathāgatassa vaṇṇe uttānameva.
“他们是我们的客人”:意谓他们是来此者、新到者、应受供养的宾客。“我通晓”:即我了知。“无量功德”:像那样的全知者尚且功德无可测量,何况如我辈?这是为了显示此理。也曾有语云——显示巴利原文
Atithī no te hontīti te amhākaṃ āgantukā navakā pāhunakā hontīti attho. Pariyāpuṇāmīti jānāmi. Aparimāṇavaṇṇoti tathārūpeneva sabbaññunāpi appameyyavaṇṇo, pageva mādisenāti dasseti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
即便佛陀赞颂佛陀的功德,
纵使以另一劫之久来称说,
纵使那漫长的劫数耗尽,
如来的功德亦无穷尽。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti.
听完这些功德的讲述,那些婆罗门心想:‘正如禅吉所称赞的沙门乔达摩,那位乔达摩尊者的确拥有无量的功德。然而,他明知这些功德,却已迁延过久。来,我们就随顺他吧。’于是,他们顺从而言:‘既然如此,尊者……’等等。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pana guṇakathaṃ sutvā te brāhmaṇā cintayiṃsu ‘‘yathā, caṅkī, samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, anomaguṇo so bhavaṃ gotamo, evaṃ tassa guṇe jānamānena kho pana iminā aticiraṃ adhivāsitaṃ, handa naṃ anuvattāmā’’ti anuvattamānā ‘‘tena hi, bho’’tiādimāhaṃsu.
426 “Opātetī”的意思是使进入。“Saṃpurekkharontī”的意思是:对待如同亲生儿女、孙辈一般的人,也让他们走在前面,带着他们一同行动。显示巴利原文
426.Opātetīti paveseti. Saṃpurekkharontīti puttamattanattamattampi samānaṃ purato katvā vicaranti.
427 “曼陀句”:曼陀本身就是曼陀句,意思是明论。“如是如是相传”这一句,表明了“听说是这样,听说是那样”这种代代相传的传承方式。“圣典传承”,指的是称为佛语的成就。这进一步指出,它们是由萨维蒂等韵文和章句编集而成,并传承下来的。“在其中”是指在那个曼陀句的范畴里。“宣说者”是使之流传的人。“那些人的”是询问这属于谁。“曼陀句”是指称为明论的曼陀。“歌咏”,是由八人伙等十位古婆罗门,凭借文句的成就而讽诵出来的。“已说”,是对他人所说的,也就是教授的意思。“集合”,意思是聚集、堆积,好比把东西收集成一堆。“随彼歌咏”,说的是现在的婆罗门,随着他们先前所歌咏的内容,去歌咏、随诵、演奏。“随彼言说”显示巴利原文
427.Mantapadanti mantāyeva mantapadaṃ, vedoti attho. Itihitiha paramparāyāti evaṃ kira evaṃ kirāti paramparabhāvena āgatanti dīpeti. Piṭakasampadāyāti pāvacanasaṅkhātasampattiyā. Sāvittiādīhi chandabandhehi ca vaggabandhehi ca sampādetvā āgatanti dasseti. Tattha cāti tasmiṃ mantapade. Pavattāroti pavattayitāro. Yesanti yesaṃ santakaṃ. Mantapadanti vedasaṅkhātaṃ mantameva. Gītanti aṭṭhakādīhi dasahi porāṇakabrāhmaṇehi padasampattivasena sajjhāyitaṃ. Pavuttanti aññesaṃ vuttaṃ, vācitanti attho. Samihitanti samupabyūḷhaṃ rāsikataṃ, piṇḍaṃ katvā ṭhapitanti attho. Tadanugāyantīti etarahi brāhmaṇā taṃ tehi pubbe gītaṃ anugāyanti anusajjhāyanti vādenti. Tadanubhāsantīti taṃ anubhāsanti, idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Bhāsitamanubhāsantīti tehi bhāsitaṃ sajjhāyitaṃ anusajjhāyanti. Vācitamanuvācentīti tehi aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācenti. Seyyathidanti te katameti attho. Aṭṭhakotiādīni tesaṃ nāmāni, te kira dibbena cakkhunā oloketvā parūpaghātaṃ akatvā kassapasammāsambuddhassa bhagavato pāvacanena saha saṃsandetvā mante ganthesuṃ, aparāpare pana brāhmaṇā pāṇātipātādīni pakkhipitvā tayo vede bhinditvā buddhavacanena saddhiṃ viruddhe akaṃsu.
428 「盲辫」(andhaveṇī):即盲人相联如辫。譬如,一位明眼人握杖一端,一盲人执杖末,另一盲人又攀此盲人,如此次第相接,五十、六十盲人连成一串,即名盲辫。「相互连结」(paramparāsaṃsattā):指他们彼此牵系,意谓脱离了持杖的明眼人。据说,曾有一骗子见一群盲人,便诱诳道:‘在某村落,饮食易得。’盲人们说:‘先生,请带我等前去,当以某物相酬。’骗子得酬后,故意离道,引入大丛林,教令前者抓住后者的腋窝,便说:‘我有些事,你们先走。’遂溜去。盲人们走了一整天,寻不着路,哭喊:‘先生,明眼人在哪里?道路在哪里?’终因迷途而悉数死于彼处。所说的「相互连结」即就这些而言。「前面的」(purimopī):在那十位古婆罗门中,一位也无。「中间的」(majjhimopī):于历代师承中,一位也无。「后面的」(pacchimopī)……显示巴利原文
428.Andhaveṇīti andhapaveṇī. Ekena hi cakkhumatā gahitayaṭṭhiyā koṭiṃ eko andho gaṇhāti, taṃ andhaṃ añño, taṃ aññoti evaṃ paṇṇāsa saṭṭhi andhā paṭipāṭiyā ghaṭitā andhaveṇīti vuccati. Paramparāsaṃsattāti aññamaññaṃ laggā, yaṭṭhiggāhakenapi cakkhumatā virahitāti attho. Eko kira dhutto andhagaṇaṃ disvā ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma gāme khajjabhojjaṃ sulabha’’nti ussāhetvā tehi ‘‘tattha no sāmi nehi, idaṃ nāma te demā’’ti vutte lañjaṃ gahetvā antarāmagge maggā okkamma mahantaṃ gacchaṃ anuparigantvā purimassa hatthena pacchimassa kacchaṃ gaṇhāpetvā ‘‘kiñci kammaṃ atthi, gacchatha tāva tumhe’’ti vatvā palāyi. Te divasampi gantvā maggaṃ avindamānā ‘‘kahaṃ, bho, cakkhumā kahaṃ maggo’’ti paridevitvā maggaṃ avindamānā tattheva mariṃsu. Te sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paramparāsaṃsattā’’ti. Purimopīti purimesu dasasu brāhmaṇesu ekopi. Majjhimopīti majjhe ācariyapācariyesu ekopi. Pacchimopīti idāni brāhmaṇesu ekopi.
「五类说」:这是在圣典所提及的两类之外,另加如此三类而说。「两种果报」:即真实的果报或不真实的果报。「于此不宜」:婆罗堕阇,意为若有智者依循‘我将守护真理’而行,那么对于‘我所执取者为真理,余皆虚妄’的立场,便不应亦不适合固执一端而定下论断。如此,世尊便为接下来的提问留出了余地。显示巴利原文
Pañcakhoti pāḷiāgatesu dvīsu aññepi evarūpe tayo pakkhipitvā vadati. Dvedhāvipākāti bhūtavipākā vā abhūtavipākā vā. Nālametthāti, bhāradvāja, saccaṃ anurakkhissāmīti paṭipannena viññunā ‘‘yaṃ mayā gahitaṃ, idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti ettha ekaṃseneva niṭṭhaṃ gantuṃ nālaṃ na yuttanti upari pucchāya maggaṃ vivaritvā ṭhapesi.
430 「此处,婆罗堕阇,有比丘」:如《耆婆经》与《大瓦洽经》等,此是世尊指自身而说。「于可贪著法」:即能引生贪著的法。其余二句的解释,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
430.Idha, bhāradvāja, bhikkhūti jīvakasutte (ma. ni. 2.51 ādayo) viya mahāvacchasutte (ma. ni. 2.193 ādayo) viya ca attānaññeva sandhāya vadati. Lobhanīyesu dhammesūti lobhadhammesu. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
432 「建立信」:即建立能信受的净信。
「亲近」:即前去接近。
「承事」:即近坐身旁。
「倾耳」:即专注倾耳倾听。
「听法」:即听闻所宣说的教法。
「忆持」:即熟练忆持、记于心中。
「审查」:即从义理与理由两方面进行思辨考察。
「忍可观察」:能堪任观察,也就是说,如实现见“此是戒、此是定”而能把握。
「欲」:即想要付诸行动的意愿心。
「努力」:即精进地从事。
「称量」:即以无常等角度加以衡量。
「勤行」:即对于道的精勤修行。
「以身证最上真理」:即以生得的名身亲证涅槃,并以智慧破除烦恼,在清晰照见涅槃时,令其显然分明。显示巴利原文
432.Saddhaṃ nivesetīti okappaniyasaddhaṃ niveseti. Upasaṅkamatīti upagacchati. Payirupāsatīti santike nisīdati. Sotanti pasādasotaṃ odahati. Dhammanti desanādhammaṃ suṇāti. Dhāretīti paguṇaṃ katvā dhāreti. Upaparikkhatīti atthato ca kāraṇato ca vīmaṃsati. Nijjhānaṃ khamantīti olokanaṃ khamanti, idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhīti evaṃ upaṭṭhahantīti attho. Chandoti kattukamyatā chando. Ussahatīti vāyamati. Tuletīti aniccādivasena tīreti. Padahatīti maggapadhānaṃ padahati. Kāyena ceva paramasaccanti sahajātanāmakāyena ca nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, paññāya ca kilese nibbijjhitvā tadeva vibhūtaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto passati.
433 「谛随觉」:即随顺于道的觉悟。
「谛证得」:即果的证得。
「正是他们的」:若理解为前文所说的十二种法,虽能随顺详尽的道说,却非此处本意。此处真正的含义是——“正是他们的”,指那些与道相应的诸法。
「勤行」:即道上的精勤。因为此道于称为果证得的“谛证得”有极重要的助益,若无道,则无果。依此方式,便能通达所有语句的意义。其余各处,显然可知。显示巴利原文
433.Saccānubodhoti maggānubodho. Saccānuppattīti phalasacchikiriyā. Tesaṃyevāti heṭṭhā vuttānaṃ dvādasannaṃ, evaṃ dīghaṃ maggavādaṃ anulometi, tasmā nāyamattho. Ayaṃ panettha attho – tesaṃyevāti tesaṃ maggasampayuttadhammānaṃ. Padhānanti maggapadhānaṃ. Tañhi phalasacchikiriyasaṅkhātāya saccānuppattiyā bahukāraṃ, magge asati phalābhāvatoti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《Esukārī经》注疏显示巴利原文
6. Esukārīsuttavaṇṇanā
437 437. “如是我闻”等,这就是《Esukārī经》。在这里,「把份额挂起」的意思是让他们把一份肉挂起来,以此来显示什么叫作“商队领袖的规矩”。据说,商队领袖在进入大沙漠旷野的途中,当牛死了以后,便取来牛肉,为所有客商把一份肉挂起来,说:“吃了这个,就该付若干本金。”对于所谓的牛肉,有人吃,有人不吃;有人能付本金,有人不能。商队领袖为了收回买那头牛所用的本金,强行向所有人分配份额并收取本金,这就是“商队领袖的规矩”。同样地,为了表明婆罗门们也是没有获得世间众生的承诺,只凭自己认定的法理便设立了四种侍奉,这才说了“同样,确实”等开头语。「他将更恶」的意思是:他会有恶。 「他将更善」的意思是:他会有利益。或者,「更恶」是指他将拥有恶劣、低劣的生存状态。「更善」是指最上、最优越的生存状态。「更善者」也就是更善。「因为高种姓」是指凭借“出身于高种姓”而更善。「更恶者」也就是更恶。而“高种姓的状态”会在两种家族里增长,也就是刹帝利家族和婆罗门家族;“容貌殊胜的状态”则在三种家族里都可能有增长,因为吠舍也会容貌殊胜;“财富殊胜的状态”在四种家族中都可能具备,因为即使是首陀罗,乃至最低贱的旃陀罗,也确确实实有拥有殊胜财富的。显示巴利原文
437.Evaṃme sutanti esukārīsuttaṃ. Tattha bilaṃ olaggeyyunti koṭṭhāsaṃ laggāpeyyuṃ, iminā satthadhammaṃ nāma dasseti. Satthavāho kira mahākantārapaṭipanno antarāmagge goṇe mate maṃsaṃ gahetvā sabbesaṃ satthikānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ khāditvā ettakaṃ mūlaṃ dātabba’’nti koṭṭhāsaṃ olaggeti, goṇamaṃsaṃ nāma khādantāpi atthi akhādantāpi, mūlaṃ dātuṃ sakkontāpi asakkontāpi. Satthavāho yena mūlena goṇo gahito, tassa nikkhamanatthaṃ sabbesaṃ balakkārena koṭṭhāsaṃ datvā mūlaṃ gaṇhāti, ayaṃ satthadhammo. Evamevaṃ brāhmaṇāpi lokassa paṭiññaṃ aggahetvā attanova dhammatāya catasso pāricariyā paññapentīti dassetuṃ evameva khotiādimāha. Pāpiyo assāti pāpaṃ assa. Seyyo assāti hitaṃ assa. Atha vā pāpiyoti pāpako lāmako attabhāvo assa. Seyyoti seṭṭho uttamo. Seyyaṃsoti seyyo. Uccākulīnatāti uccākulīnattena seyyo. Pāpiyaṃsoti pāpiyo. Uccākulīnatā ca dvīsu kulesu vaḍḍheti khattiyakule brāhmaṇakule ca, uḷāravaṇṇatā tīsu. Vessopi hi uḷāravaṇṇo hoti. Uḷārabhogatā catūsupi. Suddopi hi antamaso caṇḍālopi uḷārabhogo hotiyeva.
440 「乞食行」:据说,即便是拥有上亿财富的婆罗门,也必须行乞食。古代的婆罗门们即便拥有八十亿财富,也每日乞食一次。为何如此?为了免于这样的讥嫌:'他们是在穷困潦倒时才去乞食,如今竟又开始乞食了。'如此,讥嫌便不会产生。「正在轻蔑」:谁若舍弃乞食行的传统,靠务农、经商等维生,这人便被称为'正在轻蔑'。「如牧牛者等」的意思是:就如牧牛者若偷盗自己本应守护的物品,便成了不行应作之事的人。应以这一方法来理解所有例句中的意义。「未食的扁担」:指的是割草用的镰刀和扁担。「当追忆时」的意思是:当他在自己出生的地方,被人忆起他出身于古老父母所出的家族血统时。其余各处之义,都是显而易见的。显示巴利原文
440.Bhikkhācariyanti koṭidhanenapi hi brāhmaṇena bhikkhā caritabbāva, porāṇakabrāhmaṇā asītikoṭidhanāpi ekavelaṃ bhikkhaṃ caranti. Kasmā? Duggatakāle carantānaṃ idāni bhikkhaṃ carituṃ āraddhāti garahā na bhavissatīti. Atimaññamānoti yo bhikkhācariyavaṃsaṃ haritvā sattajīvakasikammavaṇijjādīhi jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ atimaññati nāma. Gopo vāti yathā gopako attanā rakkhitabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ thenento akiccakārī hoti, evanti attho. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Asitabyābhaṅginti tiṇalāyanaasitañceva kājañca. Anussaratoti yattha jāto, tasmiṃ porāṇe mātāpettike kulavaṃse anussariyamāneti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《陀然经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Dhanañjānisuttavaṇṇanā
445 “如是我闻”等,这就是《陀然经》。在此,「在南山地方」:'山'指山峰;这是环绕王舍城而耸立的山脉,其南方区域的那个地方的名称。「在Taṇḍulapāli门」:据说王舍城有三十二个大城门、六十四个小城门,其中有一个便叫做Taṇḍulapāli门,这是针对此门而言。「依仗国王」:他被国王派去,国王下令说:'去,不要压迫民众,把田赋收来。'他去后便收走了所有谷物。当民众说:'尊者,请不要毁了我们!'时,他却说:'对王宫里,你们的话可说轻了。国王派我来时就是这样命令的。你们别哭了!'像这样,他依仗国王掠夺婆罗门和居士们。他把大部分谷物搬进自己家,只将少量送进王宫。当又被国王问及:'你难道没有压迫婆罗门和居士们吗?'时,他便说:'是的,大王,这一季田地谷物歉收,所以我并没有压迫他们,收上来的实在不多。'像这样,他又依仗婆罗门和居士们欺骗国王。显示巴利原文
445.Evaṃme sutanti dhanañjānisuttaṃ. Tattha dakkhiṇāgirisminti girīti pabbato, rājagahaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitapabbatassa dakkhiṇadisābhāge janapadassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṇḍulapālidvārāyāti rājagahassa kira dvattiṃsamahādvārāni catusaṭṭhikhuddakadvārāni, tesu ekaṃ taṇḍulapālidvāraṃ nāma, taṃ sandhāyevamāha. Rājānaṃ nissāyāti ‘‘gaccha manusse apīḷetvā sassabhāgaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti raññā pesito gantvā sabbameva sassaṃ gaṇhāti, ‘‘mā no, bhante, nāsehī’’ti ca vutte – ‘‘rājakule vuttaṃ mandaṃ, ahaṃ raññā āgamanakāleyeva evaṃ āṇatto, mā kanditthā’’ti evaṃ rājānaṃ nissāya brāhmaṇagahapatike vilumpati. Dhaññaṃ yebhuyyena attano gharaṃ pavesetvā appakaṃ rājakule paveseti. Kiṃ brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ na pīḷaṃ akāsīti ca vutto – ‘‘āma, mahārāja, imasmiṃ vāre khettāni mandasassāni ahesuṃ, tasmā apīḷentassa me gaṇhato na bahuṃ jāta’’nti evaṃ brāhmaṇagahapatike nissāya rājānaṃ vilumpati.
446 「让他喝乳汁」:让他喝新鲜的乳汁。「直到那时饭食」:待你们喝完乳汁坐下,马上就会到用饭的时候了。这是在示意:'他们将会直接在这里,为我们送来早餐饭食。'而关于'对父母'等经文,意思是:应当寻找柔软的垫褥、被盖,精细的衣服,甘甜的饮食,以及芬芳的香、花鬘等物,来奉养年迈的父母。应当为子女们举办命名礼等一切应有的仪式,依靠这些方式养活妻儿。应当这样理解:'如果不这样做,讥嫌就会生起'的含义。显示巴利原文
446.Payo pīyatanti taruṇakhīraṃ pivatu. Tāva bhattassāti yāva khīraṃ pivitvā nisīdissatha, tāvadeva bhattassa kālo bhavissati. Idheva hi no pātarāsabhattaṃ āharissantīti dasseti. Mātāpitarotiādīsu mahallakā mātāpitaro mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇāni sukhumāni vatthāni madhurabhojanaṃ sugandhagandhamālādīni ca pariyesitvā posetabbā. Puttadhītānaṃ nāmakaraṇamaṅgalādīni sabbakiccāni karontena puttadāro posetabbo. Evañhi akariyamāne garahā uppajjatīti iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
447 “行非正法者”:在此,“非正法”是指五种恶戒行或十种恶戒行。“会拖近”:意指为了施以五种束缚等刑罚,便将那些造恶者拖到各地狱中去。显示巴利原文
447.Adhammacārīti pañca dussīlyakammāni vā dasa dussīlyakammāni vā idha adhammo nāma. Upakaḍḍheyyunti pañcavidhabandhanādikammakaraṇatthaṃ taṃ taṃ nirayaṃ kaḍḍheyyuṃ.
448 “行法者”:指从事如法耕种或吠陀学问等工作的人。“退失”:指消逝、衰退。“增进”:指前进、增长。“更善”:指更殊胜、更高明。“于低劣者”:指处于下劣、低贱的境界中。“死后,舍利弗”:这是世尊怀着“你应往彼处为其说法”的用意而对长老所说。长老也即刻前往,为大梵天说法。但从此以后,他虽然仍讲说四句偈,却再也不曾开示过“四圣谛解脱”这一法门。显示巴利原文
448.Dhammacārīti dhammikasivavijjādikammakārī. Paṭikkamantīti osaranti parihāyanti. Abhikkamantīti abhisaranti vaḍḍhanti. Seyyoti varataraṃ. Hīneti nihīne lāmake. Kālaṅkato ca sāriputtāti idaṃ bhagavā ‘‘tatrassa gantvā desehī’’ti adhippāyena theramāha. Theropi taṃkhaṇaṃyeva gantvā mahābrahmuno dhammaṃ desesi, tato paṭṭhāya cātuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ kathentopi catusaccavimuttaṃ nāma na kathesīti.
第八、《婆悉吒经》释义显示巴利原文
8. Vāseṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
454 “如是我闻”等,是《婆悉吒经》。其中,“于一奢能伽罗树林”是指在一奢能伽罗村不远处的树林中。“商伽”等五人,都是憍萨罗国波斯匿王的国师。“还有其他知名的”指还有其他许多知名的婆罗门。据说,他们每六个月会在两个地方集会:当希望净化出身时,便为此聚集在沸伽罗娑罗的住处——优迦他;当希望净化咒语时,便聚集在一奢能伽罗。这一次,他们正是为了净化咒语而集会。“其间生起了这番谈话”意思是:当他们一边走动着,一边说着与友伴情谊相应的闲谈时,在那次谈话的过程中,忽然生起了这一段不同的对话。“具戒”指具足德行。“行仪具足”指具足端正的行为规范。显示巴利原文
454.Evaṃme sutanti vāseṭṭhasuttaṃ. Tattha icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍeti icchānaṅgalagāmassa avidūre vanasaṇḍe. Caṅkīti ādayo pañcapi janā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa purohitā eva. Aññe ca abhiññātāti aññe ca bahū abhiññātā brāhmaṇā. Te kira chaṭṭhe chaṭṭhe māse dvīsu ṭhānesu sannipatanti. Yadā jātiṃ sodhetukāmā honti, tadā pokkharasātissa santike jātisodhanatthaṃ ukkaṭṭhāya sannipatanti. Yadā mante sodhetukāmā honti, tadā icchānaṅgale sannipatanti. Imasmiṃ kāle mantasodhanatthaṃ sannipatiṃsu. Ayamantarā kathāti yaṃ attano sahāyakabhāvānurūpaṃ kathaṃ kathentā anuvicariṃsu, tassā kathāya antarā ayamaññā kathā udapādi. Sīlavāti guṇavā. Vattasampannoti ācārasampanno.
455 “得师认可与自行承认”是指:得到老师“你们已经学成了”这样的认可,并且自己也承认“是的,老师,我们已经学成了”。“是”即“我们是”。“我是沸伽罗娑罗的内弟子,这位年轻人是晡哆罗的”这句话表明“我是沸伽罗娑罗的首席内弟子、最杰出的弟子,而这位年轻人是晡哆罗的弟子”。显示巴利原文
455.Anuññātapaṭiññātāti sikkhitā tumheti evaṃ ācariyehi anuññātā, āma ācariya sikkhitamhāti evaṃ sayañca paṭiññātā. Asmāti bhavāma. Ahaṃ pokkharasātissa, tārukkhassāyaṃ māṇavoti ahaṃ pokkharasātissa jeṭṭhantevāsī aggasisso, ayaṃ tārukkhassāti dīpeti.
“三明婆罗门的”是指通达三吠陀的那些婆罗门。“所宣称的”指从义理和文句上所说的任何一个字句。“我们在此中是通达圆满者”的意思是:由完全了知那一切,我们在其中已达究竟。现在,为了显示这种“圆满通达”,便说了“在字句方面……”等语。其中,“在言谈上(我们)与老师等同”的意思是:在说法言谈的场合,我们如同老师本人。显示巴利原文
Tevijjānanti tivedānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ. Yadakkhātanti yaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca ekaṃ padampi akkhātaṃ. Tatra kevalinosmaseti taṃ sakalaṃ jānanato tattha niṭṭhāgatamhāti attho. Idāni taṃ kevalibhāvaṃ āvikaronto padakasmātiādimāha. Tattha jappe ācariyasādisāti kathanaṭṭhāne mayaṃ ācariyasadisāyeva.
“以业”指以十善业道之业。因为先前那位青年针对七种身业与语业而说:“贤者,只要具戒”,又针对三种意业而说:“行仪具足”。具足这些意业的人,即是具足正行。“有眼者”是因世尊具足五种眼而以此称呼他。显示巴利原文
Kammunāti dasakusalakammapathakammunā. Ayañhi pubbe sattavidhaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yato kho, bho, sīlavā hotī’’ti āha, tividhaṃ manokammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘vattasampanno’’ti. Tena samannāgato hi ācārasampanno hoti. Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumantabhāvena bhagavantaṃ ālapati.
“超越缺损”指超越缺损与不足,即圆满义。“往诣后”指前往之后。“礼敬”即作礼敬。显示巴利原文
Khayātītanti ūnabhāvaṃ atītaṃ, paripuṇṇanti attho. Peccāti upagantvā. Namassantīti namo karonti.
“眼生于世间”:在无明黑暗的世间,破除黑暗后,通过照见世间现法利益等义,成为眼而生起。显示巴利原文
Cakkhuṃ loke samuppannanti avijjandhakāre loke taṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā lokassa diṭṭhadhammikādiatthadassanena cakkhu hutvā samuppannaṃ.
456 456. 世尊被婆悉吒如是赞叹恳请后,为摄受此二人,便说:“我将为你们解说”等语。其中,“我将解说”意为“我将开示”。“次第”指:暂且放下婆罗门的思辨,从草、树、虫、蛾开始,按次第解说。“生类分别”指详细解说生类。因为“各类有情彼此互不相同”,即这些有情各自的类别,彼此千差万别。显示巴利原文
456. Evaṃ vāseṭṭhena thometvā yācito bhagavā dvepi jane saṅgaṇhanto tesaṃ vo ahaṃ byakkhissantiādimāha. Tattha byakkhissanti byākarissāmi. Anupubbanti tiṭṭhatu tāva brāhmaṇacintā, tiṇarukkhakīṭapaṭaṅgato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā ācikkhissāmīti attho. Jātivibhaṅganti jātivitthāraṃ. Aññamaññā hi jātiyoti tesaṃ tesañhi pāṇānaṃ jātiyo aññamaññā nānappakārāti attho.
在“草木”中,先说无执取类的出生,再说有执取类的出生,由此,种种出生的差别便能明了——他以此开启了这段教导。但大息瓦长老被问及:“尊者,难道无执取类因种子差别而有不同,有执取类因业差别而有不同吗?这样说不妥当吧?”长老回答:“是的,不妥当。因为业是入母胎的。这些有情依母胎而成就,所以有种种颜色。”在“草木”这个词所指的范围中,凡是内有髓、外有皮的,乃至多罗树、椰子树等,也都属于草类;而内有坚实心材、外有髓的,全都称为树。它们并不声称“我们是草,我们是树”,也不会说“我是草,我是树”,它们没有这样的了知。虽不知自己的形态由出生类别所决定,但其形态确实由出生类别决定,与其根本所从属的草类等特征相似。何以故?因为它们的出生类别各不相同。草类是一种出生,树类是另一种出生。在草类之中,多罗树的出生是一种,椰子树的出生是另一种,应如此详细辨明。这是为了阐明:凡由出生类别而有差别的事物,即使没有自己的声称,也无人教导,仍能从其不同的类别中明显地辨别出来。如果说凭借出生便可以显示巴利原文
Tiṇarukkheti anupādinnakajātiṃ katvā pacchā upādinnakajātiṃ kathessāmi, evaṃ tassa jātibhedo pākaṭo bhavissatīti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, anupādinnakaṃ bījanānatāya nānaṃ, upādinnaṃ kammanānatāyāti? Evaṃ vattuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti pucchito āma na vaṭṭati. Kammañhi yoniyaṃ khipati. Yonisiddhā ime sattā nānāvaṇṇā hontīti. Tiṇarukkheti ettha antopheggū bahisārā antamaso tālanāḷikerādayopi tiṇāneva, antosārā pana bahipheggū sabbe rukkhā nāma. Na cāpi paṭijānareti mayaṃ tiṇā mayaṃ rukkhāti vā, ahaṃ tiṇaṃ, ahaṃ rukkhoti vā evaṃ na jānanti. Liṅgaṃ jātimayanti ajānantānampi ca tesaṃ jātimayameva saṇṭhānaṃ attano mūlabhūtatiṇādisadisameva hoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Aññamaññā hi jātiyo. Yasmā aññā tiṇajāti, aññā rukkhajāti. Tiṇesupi aññā tālajāti, aññā nāḷikerajāti, evaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Iminā idaṃ dasseti – yaṃ jātivasena nānā hoti, taṃ attano paṭiññaṃ paresaṃ vā upadesaṃ vināpi aññajātito visesena gayhati. Yadi ca jātiyā brāhmaṇo bhaveyya, sopi attano paṭiññaṃ paresaṃ vā upadesaṃ vinā khattiyato vessato suddato vā visesena gayheyya, na ca gayhati. Tasmā na jātiyā brāhmaṇoti. Parato pana ‘‘yathā etāsu jātīsū’’ti gāthāya etamatthaṃ vacībhedeneva āvikarissati.
如此示明了无执取类中的出生之后,为示现有执取类中的出生,便说道“从虫开始”等。“下至蚊蚋”,意思是以下至蚊蚋为界限。这里,那些跳跃而行的称为蝗虫。“它们彼此的出生类别也不同”:这些虫类,依其体色有蓝、红等差别,出生类别也同样种种不同。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anupādinnakesu jātiṃ dassetvā upādinnakesu dassento tato kīṭetiādimāha. Yāva kunthakipilliketi kunthakipillikaṃ pariyantaṃ katvāti attho. Ettha ca ye uppatitvā gacchanti, te paṭaṅgā nāma. Aññamaññā hi jātiyoti tesampi nīlarattādivaṇṇavasena jātiyo nānappakārāva honti.
“小者”,指黑蚁之类。“大者”,指兔、猫之类。显示巴利原文
Khuddaketi kāḷakādayo. Mahallaketi sasabiḷārādayo.
“以腹为足者”:即腹即为足者,意思是它们以腹部行走,腹部就是它们的脚。“长背者”:因为蛇从头部到尾端几乎全是背,所以被称为长背者。显示巴利原文
Pādūdareti udarapāde, udaraṃyeva nesaṃ pādāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dīghapiṭṭhiketi sappānañhi sīsato yāva naṅguṭṭhā piṭṭhiyeva hoti, tena te ‘‘dīghapiṭṭhikā’’ti vuccanti.
“水中”:指水里,即生于水中者。显示巴利原文
Udaketi odake, udakamhi jāte.
“有翅者”:指鸟类。因为它们以翅膀行进,故称“乘翅者”;因为飞行于空中,故称“行空者”。显示巴利原文
Pakkhīti sakuṇe. Te hi pattehi yantīti pattayānā, vehāsaṃ gacchantīti vihaṅgamā.
如此展示了陆地、水中、空中众生的出生差别之后,为了点明用意,便说“正如在这些出生类别中”等偈颂。其义已在简述中说尽。至于其中应详述的内容,世尊便从“不以头发”等句开始亲自开示。这里应如此连结理解:所谓“在人中,并没有众多依相状而有的出生类别”,应知是指没有那样固定的模式。例如,并非由头发决定。因为并不存在某种硬性的规定,说“婆罗门的头发如此,刹帝利的头发如彼”,并不像对大象、马、鹿等那样有固定的外形差别。应依此理贯穿所有的理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ thalajalākāsagocarānaṃ pāṇānaṃ jātibhedaṃ dassetvā idāni yenādhippāyena taṃ dasseti, taṃ āvikaronto yathā etāsūti gāthamāha. Tassattho saṅkhepena vuttova. Vitthārato panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sayameva dassento na kesehītiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘natthi manussesu liṅgajātimayaṃ puthū’’ti, taṃ evaṃ natthīti veditabbaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ? Na kesehīti. Na hi – ‘‘brāhmaṇānaṃ edisā kesā honti, khattiyānaṃ edisā’’ti niyamo atthi yathā hatthiassamigādīnanti iminā nayena sabbaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
“相状并非由出生类别而成,正如在其他出生类别中一样”这一句,应知是对前面所说意义的总结。应这样连结起来理解:正因为从头发等这些特征来看,人类当中并没有众多依出生而定的相状,所以应当了知:“在以婆罗门等分化的人类中,相状并非由出生所决定,正如在其他种类的出生中那样。”显示巴利原文
Liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ neva, yathā aññāsu jātisūti idaṃ pana vuttassevatthassa nigamananti veditabbaṃ. Tassāyaṃ yojanā – evaṃ yasmā imehi kesādīhi natthi manussesu liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ puthu, tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇādibhedesu manussesu liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ neva, yathā aññāsu jātisū’’ti.
457 457. 现在,为了显示虽然没有真实的出生差别,“婆罗门、刹帝利”这种差别又是如何产生的,便说了“各自”等一偈。这里,“差别”(vokāraṃ)即种种不同。此处的简略意义是:犹如畜生道的众生,其毛发等外形的差异纯然依母胎而定,但在婆罗门等每一类众生各自的身体上,却并没有这种固有的外形差异。纵然如此,所谓“婆罗门、刹帝利”的差别,在人类中也仅是名称的安立,只是随顺世俗言语而说。显示巴利原文
457. Idāni evaṃ jātibhede asatipi ‘‘brāhmaṇo khattiyo’’ti idaṃ nānattaṃ yathā jātaṃ , taṃ dassetuṃ paccattanti gāthamāha. Tattha vokāranti nānattaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā hi tiracchānānaṃ yonisiddhameva kesādisaṇṭhānena nānattaṃ, tathā brāhmaṇādīnaṃ attano attano sarīre taṃ natthi. Evaṃ santepi yadetaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇo khattiyo’’ti vokāraṃ, taṃ vokārañca manussesu samaññāya pavuccati, vohāramatteneva pavuccatīti.
至此,世尊破斥了婆罗堕阇的主张。倘若仅凭出身便可成为婆罗门,那么即使是活命、戒行、威仪败坏的人,也应被视作婆罗门。然而,古时的婆罗门并不承认这些人的婆罗门身份,世间也另有明辨之人,因此,世尊为彰显婆悉吒的主张,便说了「无论人们在世间如何」等八首偈颂。其中,「护田者」意为守护田地,即从事耕作。因「go」亦是土地的名称,故作此说。「依种种手艺者」指从事织布等各种手艺活。「经商者」指从事贸易。「事他者」指为他人服役工作。「箭术者」指以武器为生计,即使用弓箭与矛。「以国师为业者」指从事国师的事务。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā bhagavā bhāradvājassa vādaṃ niggaṇhitvā idāni yadi jātiyā brāhmaṇo bhaveyya, ājīvasīlācāravipannopi brāhmaṇo bhaveyya. Yasmā pana porāṇā brāhmaṇā tassa brāhmaṇabhāvaṃ na icchanti, loke ca aññepi paṇḍitamanussā, tasmā vāseṭṭhassa vādaṃ paggaṇhanto yo hi koci manussesūti aṭṭha gāthā āha. Tattha gorakkhanti khettarakkhaṃ, kasikammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Goti hi pathaviyā nāmaṃ, tasmā evamāha. Puthusippenāti tantavāyakammādinānāsippena. Vohāranti vaṇijjaṃ. Parapessenāti paresaṃ veyyāvaccakammena. Issatthanti āvudhajīvikaṃ, usuñca sattiṃ cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Porohiccenāti purohitakammena.
如此,先依婆罗门的传统与世间的通称,成立了活命、戒行、威仪败坏者并非婆罗门。既然如此成立,便意味着不是由出身而成为婆罗门,而是依功德而为婆罗门。因此,无论生于哪一个家族,只要是具足功德者,他便是婆罗门,这就是此处的正理。这样从义理上证成此理后,现在为以言辞揭示它,便说出「我不说彼为婆罗门」等语。其意为:于我而言,那位仅凭「母胎所生、从母而生」者——无论他是四生中哪一类,特别是出生于婆罗门所称许的母胎者,即那些婆罗门用「他是两方善生」等方式所称说的、意指婆罗门清净出身之道的「母胎」,也就是以「清净家系」来指称的母系成就;由于从那里出生、生起,故被称为「母胎所生、从母而生」——我仅因此而不说他是婆罗门。为什么呢?因为他只是凭「喂!尊驾!」这样的称呼而有别于其他有执取者,因而被称为「称喂者」,只要他还带着……显示巴利原文
Evaṃ brāhmaṇasamayena ca lokavohārena ca ājīvasīlācāravipannassa abrāhmaṇabhāvaṃ sādhetvā evaṃ sante na jātiyā brāhmaṇo, guṇehi pana brāhmaṇo hoti. Tasmā yattha katthaci kule jāto yo guṇavā, so brāhmaṇo, ayamettha ñāyoti evametaṃ ñāyaṃ atthato āpādetvā idāni naṃ vacībhedena pakāsento na cāhaṃ brāhmaṇantiādimāha. Tassattho – ahañhi yvāyaṃ catunnaṃ yonīnaṃ yattha katthaci jāto, tatrāpi visesena yo brāhmaṇassa saṃvaṇṇitāya mātari sambhūto, taṃ yonijaṃ mattisambhavaṃ, yā cāyaṃ ubhato sujātotiādinā nayena brāhmaṇehi brāhmaṇassa parisuddhauppattimaggasaṅkhātā yoni vuttā, saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti iminā ca mātisampatti, tatopi jātasambhūtattā yonijo mattisambhavoti vuccati, taṃ yonijaṃ mattisambhavaṃ iminā ca yonijamattisambhavamattena na brāhmaṇaṃ brūmi. Kasmā? Yasmā, bho bhoti, vacanamattena aññehi sakiñcanehi visiṭṭhattā bhovādi nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano sapalibodho. Yo panāyaṃ yattha katthaci jātopi rāgādikiñcanābhāvena akiñcano, sabbagahaṇapaṭinissaggena anādāno, akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ, tamahaṃ brūmibrāhmaṇaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā bāhitapāpoti.
458 458. 「更有何者,断除一切结」等,共有二十七首偈颂。其中,「一切结」指十种结。「他不战栗」指不因渴爱所引发的战栗而动摇。「超越附着」指已超越了贪着等附着。「离系」指从四生中脱离,或从一切烦恼中解脱。显示巴利原文
458. Kiñcabhiyyo sabbasaṃyojanaṃ chetvātiādi sattavīsati gāthā. Tattha sabbasaṃyojananti dasavidhasaṃyojanaṃ. Na paritassatīti taṇhāparitassanāya na paritassati. Saṅgātiganti rāgasaṅgādayo atikkantaṃ. Visaṃyuttanti catūhi yonīhi sabbakilesehi vā visaṃyuttaṃ.
“羁索”指忿恨。“皮革带”指渴爱。“绳索”指轭套,是“见现起”的别称。“连同轭序”中的“轭序”,指用来将套索系紧的结,是“见随眠”的名称。“已举闩”的“闩”指无明。“已觉”指觉悟了四谛。“他安忍”指他能够堪忍。显示巴利原文
Naddhinti upanāhaṃ. Varattanti taṇhaṃ. Sandānanti yuttapāsaṃ, diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sahanukkamanti anukkamo vuccati pāse pavesanagaṇṭhi, diṭṭhānusayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ukkhittapalighanti ettha palighoti avijjā. Buddhanti catusaccabuddhaṃ. Titikkhatīti khamati.
“忍力”指安忍的忍耐力。但这种忍耐力若仅生起一次,还不能称为“力量之军”;唯有反复、持续地生起,才可称为“力量之军”。正是由于它的存在,才会有力量之军。显示巴利原文
Khantibalanti adhivāsanakhantibalaṃ. Sā pana sakiṃ uppannā balānīkaṃ nāma na hoti, punappunaṃ uppannā pana hoti. Tassā atthitāya balānīkaṃ.
“持头陀支者”指具备头陀支的人。“持戒者”指具足德行的人。“无漏泄者”指远离了贪等漏泄的人。也有的版本读作“Anussuta”,其义同样是无漏泄。“调伏者”指无有恼害的人。显示巴利原文
Vatavantanti dhutaṅgavantaṃ. Sīlavantanti guṇavantaṃ. Anussadanti rāgādiussadavirahitaṃ. ‘‘Anussuta’’ntipi pāṭho, anavassutanti attho. Dantanti nibbisevanaṃ.
「不染着」即不粘着。「于诸欲」指对于烦恼欲与事物欲。显示巴利原文
Na limpatīti na allīyati. Kāmesūti kilesakāmavatthukāmesu.
「他了知苦」,这里“灭尽”即指以阿罗汉果作为苦的灭尽。「了知」指通过证得而了知。「已舍重担」指已放下重担:即卸除了蕴、烦恼、行与五欲功德等重担,并安住于此。「离系位」含义如前所说。显示巴利原文
Dukkhassapajānāti, idheva khayanti ettha arahattaphalaṃ dukkhakkhayoti adhippetaṃ. Pajānātīti adhigamavasena jānāti. Pannabhāranti ohitabhāraṃ, khandhakilesaabhisaṅkhārakāmaguṇabhāre otāretvā ṭhitaṃ. Visaṃyuttapadaṃ vuttatthameva.
「甚深慧」指于甚深所缘中运行的智慧。「聪慧者」指因天赋智慧而具足智慧者。显示巴利原文
Gambhīrapaññanti gambhīresu ārammaṇesu pavattapaññaṃ. Medhāvinti pakatipaññāya paññavantaṃ.
“于非居家者,两方……”意为:既与非居家者(出家人)不相混杂,也与这两方(在家众与出家众)均不相混杂,即与二者皆不相混杂。“不行于居家”中,“居家”指的是五种欲乐的居所,意为不攀附、不黏着于彼处。“少欲”意为无所欲求。显示巴利原文
Anāgārehicūbhayanti anāgārehi ca visaṃsaṭṭhaṃ ubhayañca, dvīhipi cetehi visaṃsaṭṭhamevāti attho. Anokasārinti okaṃ vuccati pañcakāmaguṇālayo, taṃ anallīyamānanti attho. Appicchanti anicchaṃ.
“于有渴爱者”指于诸有渴爱的众生。“于无渴爱者”指于诸离渴爱的众生。显示巴利原文
Tasesūti sataṇhesu. Thāvaresūti nittaṇhesu.
“于执杖者”指于手持棍杖的众生。“寂灭者”指依烦恼的寂灭而证得清凉者。“于有执取者”指于诸有执取的众生。显示巴利原文
Attadaṇḍesūti gahitadaṇḍesu. Nibbutanti kilesanibbānena nibbutaṃ. Sādānesūti saupādānesu.
「Ohita」指已卸下者。显示巴利原文
Ohitoti patito.
459 「Akakkasa」指无过失、不粗涩;因为有瑕疵的树木也会被称为粗涩。「Viññāpana」指能令意义被了知。「Sacca」指真实不虚。「Udīraye」指言说。「Yāya nābhisajje」的意思是:以那样的言语,不使他人产生执著或缠缚,即说无粗恶的言语。显示巴利原文
459.Akakkasanti niddosaṃ. Sadoso hi rukkhopi sakakkasoti vuccati. Viññāpaninti atthaviññāpanikaṃ. Saccanti avisaṃvādikaṃ. Udīrayeti bhaṇati. Yāyanābhisajjeti yāya girāya parassa sajjanaṃ vā lagganaṃ vā na karoti, tādisaṃ apharusaṃ giraṃ bhāsatīti attho.
「Dīgha」指长而串连的物品。「Rassa」指短而散放的物品。「Aṇu」指细小的物品。「Thūla」指粗大的物品。「Subhāsubha」指美好与不美好的物品。因为长的物品中既有不值钱的,也有很值钱的;对于短等物品也是如此。由此,仅说长短大小尚不能涵盖一切物品,而‘美好与不美好’这一项则涵盖了一切。显示巴利原文
Dīghanti suttāruḷhabhaṇḍaṃ. Rassanti vippakiṇṇabhaṇḍaṃ. Aṇunti khuddakaṃ. Thūlanti mahantaṃ. Subhāsubhanti sundarāsundaraṃ. Dīghabhaṇḍañhi appagghampi hoti mahagghampi. Rassādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti ettāvatā na sabbaṃ pariyādiṇṇaṃ, ‘‘subhāsubha’’nti iminā pana pariyādiṇṇaṃ hoti.
「Nirāsaya」指无渴爱,即离贪。显示巴利原文
Nirāsayanti nittaṇhaṃ.
「Ālaya」指渴爱的执著处。「Aññāya」指已经了知。「Amatogadha」指已入不死之境。「Anuppatta」指已经证得。显示巴利原文
Ālayāti taṇhālayā. Aññāyāti jānitvā. Amatogadhanti amatabbhantaraṃ. Anuppattanti anupaviṭṭhaṃ.
「Ubho saṅga」指这两者都是执著。因为福业使人粘著于天界,非福业使人粘著于恶趣,因此说这两者都是执著。「Upaccagā」指已经超越。显示巴利原文
Ubho saṅganti ubhayampetaṃ saṅgaṃ. Puññañhi sagge laggāpeti, apuññaṃ apāye, tasmā ubhayampetaṃ saṅganti āha. Upaccagāti atīto.
「Anāvila」指远离了令心浑浊的烦恼。「Nandībhavaparikkhīṇa」指喜已灭尽、有已灭尽。显示巴利原文
Anāvilanti āvilakaraṇakilesavirahitaṃ. Nandībhavaparikkhīṇanti parikkhīṇanandiṃ parikkhīṇabhavaṃ.
在「Yo ima」这一偈中,无明因其欺诳的性质而被称为「险途」;因是大难处,故称「难处」;因导致流转,故称「轮回」;因令人迷惑,故称「痴」。「已渡过」(Tiṇṇo) 指已渡过四瀑流。「到彼岸」(Pāraṅgato) 指已证达涅槃。「禅修者」(Jhāyī) 指依所缘相专注而入定者。「无动」(Anejo) 指无渴爱。「无取著而寂灭」(Anupādāyanibbuto) 指不执取任何事物,通过灭尽一切烦恼而证入寂灭者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo ima’’nti gāthāya avijjāyeva visaṃvādakaṭṭhena palipatho, mahāviduggatāya duggaṃ, saṃsaraṇaṭṭhena saṃsāro, mohanaṭṭhena mohoti vutto. Tiṇṇoti caturoghatiṇṇo. Pāraṅgatoti nibbānaṃ gato. Jhāyīti ārammaṇalakkhaṇūpanijjhānavasena jhāyī. Anejoti nittaṇho. Anupādāyanibbutoti kiñci gahaṇaṃ aggahetvā sabbakilesanibbānena nibbuto.
「欲」(Kāme) 指两种意义上的欲。「无家者」(Anāgāro) 指出家后。「游行」(Paribbaje) 指四处游方。「欲与有已灭尽」(Kāmabhavaparikkhīṇaṃ) 指已灭尽了欲与有的渴爱。显示巴利原文
Kāmeti duvidhepi kāme. Anāgāroti anāgāro hutvā. Paribbajeti paribbajati. Kāmabhavaparikkhīṇanti khīṇakāmaṃ khīṇabhavaṃ.
“人的束缚”指人对五种欲乐的束缚,“天的束缚”指天人对五种欲乐的束缚,“已离一切束缚者”指已脱离一切烦恼束缚的人。显示巴利原文
Mānusakaṃ yoganti mānusakaṃ pañcakāmaguṇayogaṃ. Dibbaṃ yoganti dibbaṃ pañcakāmaguṇayogaṃ. Sabbayogavisaṃyuttanti sabbakilesayogavisaṃyuttaṃ.
“乐”指对五种欲乐的贪爱,“不乐”指对修习善法感到厌倦,“精进者”指具足精进力的人。显示巴利原文
Ratinti pañcakāmaguṇaratiṃ. Aratinti kusalabhāvanāya ukkaṇṭhitaṃ. Vīranti vīriyavantaṃ.
“善逝”指已到达殊胜之处者,或以殊胜的修行方法而到达目标者。显示巴利原文
Sugatanti sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gataṃ, sundarāya vā paṭipattiyā gataṃ.
「趣」指再生。「前」指过去世。「后」指未来世。「中」指现在世。「障碍」指能造成障碍的烦恼。显示巴利原文
Gatinti nibbattiṃ. Pureti atīte. Pacchāti anāgate. Majjheti paccuppanne. Kiñcananti kiñcanakārako kileso.
「大仙」因遍求宏大功德而得名。「胜者」指已战胜烦恼并获得胜利之人。显示巴利原文
Mahesinti mahante guṇe pariyesanaṭṭhena mahesiṃ. Vijitāvinanti vijitavijayaṃ.
460 460. 世尊这样从功德层面说明了唯有漏尽者才是真正的婆罗门之后,为了指出那些执着“凭出身即是婆罗门”的人对此义的无知,并揭示这种见解实为恶见,于是宣说了“这仅是名称而已”等两首偈颂。偈颂的义理是:所谓婆罗门、刹帝利、婆罗堕阇、婆悉吒等名种,皆属人为施设、造作、建构;这只不过是世间的共称,仅是言说罢了。为何如此?因为这种共称是随顺众人的习惯而共同生起的。正是他出生之时,各地的亲戚族人为他造作了这些称呼。若无这些施设,则无人能从这些便知“此是婆罗门”或“此是婆罗堕阇”。这个人为施设的事物,长久以来作为随眠烦恼潜藏于众生心中,并在不了知真相者心中形成了恶见。这个施设的名种,本“仅是名种而已,是为了方便称呼而施设的”,但对于不了知真相的众生而言,这种恶见长久以来便已存在。显示巴利原文
460. Evaṃ bhagavā guṇato khīṇāsavaṃyeva brāhmaṇaṃ dassetvā ye jātito brāhmaṇoti abhinivesaṃ karonti, te idaṃ ajānantā, sāva nesaṃ diṭṭhi duddiṭṭhīti dassento samaññā hesāti gāthādvayamāha. Tassattho – yadidaṃ brāhmaṇo khattiyo bhāradvājo vāseṭṭhoti nāmagottaṃ pakappitaṃ kataṃ abhisaṅkhataṃ, samaññā hesā lokasmiṃ, vohāramattanti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā samuccā samudāgataṃ samaññāya āgataṃ. Etañhi tattha tattha jātakāleyevassa ñātisālohitehi pakappitaṃ kataṃ. No ce naṃ evaṃ pakappeyyuṃ, na koci kiñci disvā ayaṃ brāhmaṇoti vā bhāradvājoti vā jāneyya. Evaṃ pakappitaṃ petaṃ dīgharattānusayitaṃ, diṭṭhigatamajānataṃ, taṃ pakappitaṃ nāmagottaṃ ‘‘nāmagottamattametaṃ, vohāratthaṃ pakappita’’nti, ajānantānaṃ sattānaṃ hadaye dīgharattaṃ diṭṭhigatamanusayitaṃ. Tassa anusayitattā taṃ nāmagottaṃ ajānantā no pabrunti, ‘‘jātiyā hoti brāhmaṇo’’ti ajānantāva evaṃ vadantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
这样指出“执着‘依出身即为婆罗门’者,不知此仅是一种称谓,其见乃是恶见”之后,为彻底驳斥出身论、确立业论,而说了“不是由出身……”等句。在那里,为了详细解释“以业”这半首偈颂,而说“农夫以业……”等句。其中“以业”是指由现世农耕等行为所生的思业。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘ye ‘jātito brāhmaṇo’ti abhinivesaṃ karonti, te idaṃ vohāramattaṃ ajānantā, sāva nesaṃ diṭṭhi duddiṭṭhī’’ti dassetvā idāni nippariyāyameva jātivādaṃ paṭikkhipanto kammavādañca patiṭṭhapento na jaccātiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘kammunā’’ti upaḍḍhagāthāya vitthāraṇatthaṃ kassako kammunātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kammunāti paccuppannena kasikammādinibbattakacetanākammunā.
“缘起见者”:指以“缘此而有彼”的方式,如是见缘起的人。“业果善巧者”:于应受尊敬或应受轻慢的家族中,投生依业而发生;其他种种低劣与殊胜的差别,也是在低劣或殊胜之业成熟时显现的。如此,便是对于业果善巧之人。显示巴利原文
Paṭiccasamuppādadassāti iminā paccayena evaṃ hotīti evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādadassāvino. Kammavipākakovidāti sammānāvamānārahakule kammavasena uppatti hoti, aññāpi hīnapaṇītatā hīnapaṇīte kamme vipaccamāne hotīti. Evaṃ kammavipākakusalā.
在“世间以业而转”这首偈颂中,“世间”、“众生”、“有情”三者意义相同,只是用词有别。应知此处第一句是为驳斥“有梵天、大梵天、最胜者、创造者”这样的见解。因为世间确实依业在诸趣中流转,哪里有什么创造者呢?第二句则显示:“如此由业投生的众生,在相续过程中,亦依过去与现在不同之业而转;他在领受苦乐、显现低劣与殊胜等差别相的同时,持续流转。”第三句总结此义:“因此,在一切情况下,众生都以业为系缚,唯为业所系而流转,并非其他原因。”第四句以譬喻说明:犹如正在行进的马车,车轴销钉是它的联结处,若不这样联结,车便无法行进;同样地,世间在生起与相续上,都以业为它的联结处,不以业联结,则不会生起,亦不会流转。显示巴利原文
Kammunā vattatīti gāthāya pana lokoti vā pajāti vā sattoti vā ekoyevattho, vacanamattabhedo. Purimapadena cettha ‘‘atthi brahmā mahābrahmā seṭṭho sajitā’’ti diṭṭhiyā paṭisedho veditabbo. Kammunā hi tāsu tāsu gatīsu vattati loko, tassa ko sajitāti. Dutiyapadena ‘‘evaṃ kammunā nibbattopi ca pavattepi atītapaccuppannabhedena kammunā vattati, sukhadukkhāni paccanubhonto hīnapaṇītādibhedañca āpajjanto pavattatī’’ti dasseti. Tatiyena tamevatthaṃ nigameti ‘‘evaṃ sabbathāpi kammanibandhanā sattā kammeneva baddhā hutvā pavattanti, na aññathā’’ti. Catutthena tametthaṃ upamāya vibhāveti. Yathā hi rathassa yāyato āṇi nibandhanaṃ hoti, na tāya anibaddho yāti, evaṃ lokassa nibbattato ca pavattato ca kammaṃ nibandhanaṃ, na tena anibaddho nibbattati na pavattati.
此中,世间既为业所系缚,为显示由最胜业而成就最胜之理,遂说“以苦行……”等两首偈颂。其中,“以苦行”指头陀支的苦行。“以梵行”指远离淫欲。“以自制”指持守戒律。“以调伏”指调御诸根。“由此”即由这种最殊胜、清净、已成就梵行的业,而成为婆罗门。为什么呢?因为这是最上的婆罗门,也就是说,这种业是最上的婆罗门功德。另有一说读作“梵的”。此处,其词义为:能带来梵的状态,故称“梵的”,即能成就婆罗门性。显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmā evaṃ kammanibandhano loko, tasmā seṭṭhena kammunā seṭṭhabhāvaṃ dassento tapenāti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha tapenāti dhutaṅgatapena. Brahmacariyenāti methunaviratiyā. Saṃyamenāti sīlena . Damenāti indriyadamena. Etenāti etena seṭṭhena parisuddhena brahmabhūtena kammunā brāhmaṇo hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā etaṃ brāhmaṇamuttamaṃ, yasmā etaṃ kammaṃ uttamo brāhmaṇaguṇoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Brahmāna’’ntipi pāṭho. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – brahmaṃ ānetīti brahmānaṃ, brāhmaṇabhāvaṃ āvahatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
第二首偈颂中的“寂静者”:指烦恼已息灭的人。“梵天与帝释”:即梵天和帝释。意思是,像这样的人,不仅是一位婆罗门,在具慧的智者看来,他实是梵天与帝释本身。婆悉吒,你应当如此了知——这是这句话的要义。其余各处,意思都很明显。显示巴利原文
Dutiyagāthāya santoti santakileso. Brahmā sakkoti brahmā ca sakko ca, yo evarūpo, so na kevalaṃ brāhmaṇo, atha kho brahmā ca sakko ca so vijānataṃ paṇḍitānaṃ, evaṃ vāseṭṭha, jānāhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第九品 《净妙经》的注释解释显示巴利原文
9. Subhasuttavaṇṇanā
462 462. “如是我闻……”此为《净妙经》。其中,“多德亚之子”(todeyyaputto)指住在杜提村的多德亚婆罗门的儿子。“Ārādhako hotī”指成为成就者、圆满者。“Ñāyaṃ dhammaṃ”指合乎道理的教法。“Kusalanti”指无有过失的。显示巴利原文
462.Evaṃme sutanti subhasuttaṃ. Tattha todeyyaputtoti tudigāmavāsino todeyyabrāhmaṇassa putto. Ārādhako hotīti sampādako hoti paripūrako. Ñāyaṃ dhammanti kāraṇadhammaṃ. Kusalanti anavajjaṃ.
463 「Micchāpaṭipattinti」指不能导向解脱、不善的修行道。「Sammāpaṭipattinti」指能导向解脱、善的修行道。显示巴利原文
463.Micchāpaṭipattinti aniyyānikaṃ akusalapaṭipadaṃ. Sammāpaṭipattinti niyyānikaṃ kusalapaṭipadaṃ.
在「大事务」等词中,因有众多办事人或众多资具,事务繁多,故称“大事务”;因有盛大的取名、庆典等仪式,故称“大仪式”;因有今日应做此事、明日应做彼事等众多名为“管理”的待办事项,故称“大管理”;因众人忙于劳作时,会产生名为“逼迫”的大规模筹备,故称“大筹备”。「gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānaṃ」指“在家的工作处”,即在家从事的事业。所有相关的词句,都应如此理解。在此,农耕事业因需寻找犁尖等工具,故属“大事务”性;而经商则是基于已有货物就地转卖,应知属“小事务”性。若失败,例如农耕遭遇干旱或洪涝等灾害,经商则因宝石、黄金等物品上有瑕疵,事业便收获微薄,乃至血本无归。若成功,则能获得“大果”,如同那位年幼的学徒一样。显示巴利原文
Mahaṭṭhantiādīsu mahantehi veyyāvaccakarehi vā upakaraṇehi vā bahūhi attho etthāti mahaṭṭhaṃ. Mahantāni nāmaggahaṇamaṅgalādīni kiccāni etthāti mahākiccaṃ. Idaṃ ajja kattabbaṃ, idaṃ sveti evaṃ mahantāni adhikārasaṅkhātāni adhikaraṇāni etthāti mahādhikaraṇaṃ. Bahūnaṃ kamme yuttappayuttatāvasena pīḷāsaṅkhāto mahāsamārambho etthāti mahāsamārambhaṃ. Gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānanti gharāvāsakammaṃ. Evaṃ sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Kasikamme cettha naṅgalakoṭiṃ ādiṃ katvā upakaraṇānaṃ pariyesanavasena mahaṭṭhatā, vaṇijjāya yathāṭhitaṃyeva bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā parivattanavasena appaṭṭhatā veditabbā. Vipajjamānanti avuṭṭhiativuṭṭhiādīhi kasikammaṃ, maṇisuvaṇṇādīsu acchekatādīhi ca vaṇijjakammaṃ appaphalaṃ hoti, mūlacchedampi pāpuṇāti. Vipariyāyena sampajjamānaṃ mahapphalaṃ cūḷantevāsikassa viya.
464 正如这样,农耕事业失败时收获微薄,在家的事业也是如此,因为一个“未作善”的人死后会投生地狱。据说曾有一位名叫“大财将军”的婆罗门信徒,他临终时地狱的景象显现。婆罗门们问他:“你看见了什么?”他答:“一个血红的屋子。”他们说:“尊者,这就是梵天界呀。”他问:“尊者,梵天界在哪里?”众人答:“在上面。”他却说:“但对我来说,它呈现在下面。”虽然他口称“上面”,死后还是投生了地狱。众人说:“这人在我们的祭祀中犯了错误。”于是给了他一千钱,将他逐出。然而,若在家事业成功,便能获得“大果”,因为一个“作了善行”的人死后会投生天界。这整个内容可用《古帝喇天宫谈》来说明。同样,如同经商事业失败时收获微薄,那些戒行不圆满、以邪命谋生的出家事业也是如此。这样的人,既得不到禅那之乐,也达不到天界与解脱。但若成功,则能获得“大果”,因为此人戒行圆满,增长观智,乃至能证得阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
464.Evameva khoti yathā kasikammaṭṭhānaṃ vipajjamānaṃ appaphalaṃ hoti, evaṃ gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānampi. Akatakalyāṇo hi kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbattati. Mahādattasenāpati nāma kireko brāhmaṇabhatto ahosi, tassa maraṇasamaye nirayo upaṭṭhāsi. So brāhmaṇehi ‘‘kiṃ passasī’’ti vutto? Lohitagharanti āha. Brahmaloko bho esoti. Brahmaloko nāma bho kahanti? Uparīti. Mayhaṃ heṭṭhā upaṭṭhātīti. Kiñcāpi heṭṭhā upaṭṭhāti , tathāpi uparīti kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbatto. ‘‘Iminā amhākaṃ yaññe doso dinno’’ti sahassaṃ gahetvā nīharituṃ adaṃsu. Sampajjamānaṃ pana mahapphalaṃ hoti. Katakalyāṇo hi kālaṃ katvā sagge nibbattati. Sakalāya guttilavimānakathāya dīpetabbaṃ. Yathā pana taṃ vaṇijjakammaṭṭhānaṃ vipajjamānaṃ appaphalaṃ hoti, evaṃ sīlesu aparipūrakārino anesanāya yuttassa pabbajjākammaṭṭhānampi. Evarūpā hi neva jhānādisukhaṃ na saggamokkhaṃ labhati. Sampajjamānaṃ pana mahapphalaṃ hoti. Sīlāni hi pūretvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento arahattampi pāpuṇāti.
“婆罗门们,乔达摩尊者”——他此处想问的是什么呢?婆罗门们宣称:“出家人中没有任何人能圆满这五种法,只有在家人才行。”然而,沙门乔达摩却反复说:“年轻人啊,不论是在家人还是出家人。”他根本不放弃出家人也能圆满的观点,我猜想他可能没有理解我所提出的问题。就这样,他以“施舍”为首来询问这五种法。“Sace te agarū”:如果你不觉得为难,意思是,如婆罗门们所宣说的那样在此讲说,若对你来说并非负担,若你没有任何不适,便请说吧。“尊者,对我来说并不为难”——他为何这样说?因为与那些貌似聪明的人交谈实在辛苦,他们会逐字逐句地挑毛病。然而,那些智慧真正圆满的人听闻教法后,若讲得好便会赞叹;若在讲述中发现经文、义理、言辞有不合之处,便会一一加以纠正。而世间没有比世尊智慧更圆满的人了,因此他说:“乔达摩尊者,对我来说并不为难,只要您或像您一样尊贵的人坐在某处。”“Saccaṃ”指说真实语。“Tapaṃ”指修苦行。“Brahmacariyaṃ”指远离淫欲。“Ajj显示巴利原文
Brāhmaṇā, bho gotamoti idha kiṃ pucchāmīti pucchati? Brāhmaṇā vadanti – ‘‘pabbajito ime pañca dhamme pūretuṃ samattho nāma natthi, gahaṭṭhova pūretī’’ti. Samaṇo pana gotamo – ‘‘gihissa vā ahaṃ māṇava pabbajitassa vā’’ti punappunaṃ vadati, neva pabbajitaṃ muñcati, mayhameva pucchaṃ maññe na sallakkhetīti cāgasīsena pañca dhamme pucchāmīti pucchati. Sace te agarūti sace tuyhaṃ yathā brāhmaṇā paññapenti, tathā idha bhāsituṃ bhāriyaṃ na hoti, yadi na koci aphāsukabhāvo hoti, bhāsassūti attho. Na kho me, bhoti kiṃ sandhāyāha? Paṇḍitapaṭirūpakānañhi santike kathetuṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, te pade pade akkhare akkhare dosameva vadanti. Ekantapaṇḍitā pana kathaṃ sutvā sukathitaṃ pasaṃsanti, dukkathite pāḷipadaatthabyañjanesu yaṃ yaṃ virujjhati, taṃ taṃ ujuṃ katvā denti. Bhagavatā ca sadiso ekantapaṇḍito nāma natthi, tenāha ‘‘na kho me, bho gotama, garu, yatthassu bhavanto vā nisinno bhavantarūpo vā’’ti. Saccanti vacīsaccaṃ. Tapanti tapacariyaṃ. Brahmacariyanti methunaviratiṃ. Ajjhenanti mantagahaṇaṃ. Cāganti āmisapariccāgaṃ.
466 “Pāpito bhavissati”指将会被带向无知的状态。“Etadavoca”指:他被世尊以“盲人队列”的比喻驳倒后,完全无法反驳,就像一只胆小的狗惊起猎物,让猎物直面主人,自己却退缩一旁;同样地,他把责难推给老师,说道:“婆罗门……”等等。其中,“沸伽罗娑罗”是他的名字,也被称为“沸伽罗娑夷”。据说他的身体肤色如白莲花,光彩夺目,宛如天宫中升起的银色拱门;头发则呈黑蓝色,犹如蓝宝石所成;胡须如圆月表面的一抹乌云;双眼如青莲花;鼻子如银管般笔挺圆润,极为洁净;手、脚掌和面庞如同经过蜡红色抛光处理,光彩照人。这位婆罗门的形体极其庄严。即使在无政府之地,这位婆罗门也适合被推举为国王,威光就是如此显赫。因其形象似莲花,故人们称他为“沸伽罗娑罗”;又因他于莲花中化生,而非母胎所生,所以也有人称他为“沸伽罗娑夷”。“Opamañño”指他属于乌跋摩尼族。“Subhagavaniko”指他是郁伽吒地区幸运林的主人。“Hassakaṃyevā”指这仅仅是显示巴利原文
466.Pāpito bhavissatīti. Ajānanabhāvaṃ pāpito bhavissati. Etadavocāti bhagavatā andhaveṇūpamāya niggahito taṃ paccāharituṃ asakkonto yathā nāma dubbalasunakho migaṃ uṭṭhapetvā sāmikassa abhimukhaṃ katvā sayaṃ apasakkati, evamevaṃ ācariyaṃ apadisanto evaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇo’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha pokkharasātīti idaṃ tassa nāmaṃ, ‘‘pokkharasāyī’’tipi vuccati. Tassa kira kāyo setapokkharasadiso devanagare ussāpitarajatatoraṇaṃ viya sobhati, sīsaṃ panassa kāḷavaṇṇaindanīlamayaṃ viya, massupi candamaṇḍale kāḷamegharāji viya khāyati, akkhīni nīluppalasadisāni, nāsā rajatapanāḷikā viya suvaṭṭitā suparisuddhā, hatthapādatalāni ceva mukhañca katalākhārasaparikammaṃ viya sobhati. Ativiya sobhaggappatto brāhmaṇassa attabhāvo. Arājake ṭhāne rājānaṃ kātuṃ yuttamimaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ, evamesa sassiriko, iti naṃ pokkharasadisattā ‘‘pokkharasātī’’ti sañjānanti, pokkhare pana so nibbatto, na mātukucchiyanti iti naṃ pokkhare sayitattā ‘‘pokkharasāyī’’tipi sañjānanti. Opamaññoti upamaññagotto. Subhagavanikoti ukkaṭṭhāya subhagavanassa issaro. Hassakaṃyevāti hasitabbakaññeva. Nāmakaṃyevāti lāmakaṃyeva. Tadeva taṃ atthābhāvena rittakaṃ. Rittakattā ca tucchakaṃ. Idāni naṃ bhagavā sācariyakaṃ niggaṇhituṃ kiṃ pana māṇavātiādimāha.
467 这里“他们中哪种话较为优胜?”意思是哪种话对他们来说更好、更值得称赞。“依世俗”指依据世俗社会的共同约定。“衡量”指经过权衡、了解之后。“审察”指了知之后。“与义相应”指基于合理的理由。如此说来,即在不脱离世间言说、经过权衡了解,并基于合理理由而述说的状态下,才称得上是较为优胜的。“覆盖”指被遮蔽。“遮掩”指被阻挡。“笼罩”指被缠住。“遍覆”指被紧密地包裹、缠绕。显示巴利原文
467. Tattha katamā nesaṃ seyyoti katamā vācā tesaṃ seyyo, pāsaṃsataroti attho. Sammuccāti sammutiyā lokavohārena. Mantāti tulayitvā pariggaṇhitvā. Paṭisaṅkhāyāti jānitvā. Atthasaṃhitanti kāraṇanissitaṃ. Evaṃ santeti lokavohāraṃ amuñcitvā tulayitvā jānitvā kāraṇanissitaṃ katvā kathitāya seyyabhāve sati. Āvutoti āvarito. Nivutoti nivārito. Ophuṭoti onaddho. Pariyonaddhoti paliveṭhito.
468 “系着”等词的意思如前所述。“乔达摩尊者,若此理成立”意思是:如果这个理由是成立的。“那个火”指由于没有烟与灰烬等,那个火焰便是有明亮火焰、具足色彩、极其光净的。“年轻人,我举出同样的比喻”意为我举出与那火相对应的比喻。这句话的意思是:正如依靠草木薪柴而燃烧的火,因为有烟、灰、炭而有缺陷;同样地,依赖五种欲功德而生起的喜悦,因为有生、老、病、死、忧愁等而有缺陷。然而,正如离了草木薪柴的火,因为没有烟等而成为“清净”;同样地,与出世间两种禅那相应的喜悦,因为没有生、老等而成为“清净”。这就是此句的义理。显示巴利原文
468.Gadhitotiādīni vuttatthāneva. Sace taṃ, bho gotama, ṭhānanti sace etaṃ kāraṇamatthi. Svāssāti dhūmachārikādīnaṃ abhāvena so assa aggi accimā ca vaṇṇimā ca pabhassaro cāti. Tathūpamāhaṃ māṇavāti tappaṭibhāgaṃ ahaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yatheva hi tiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṃ paṭicca jalamāno aggi dhūmachārikaṅgārānaṃ atthitāya sadoso hoti , evamevaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppannā pīti jātijarābyādhimaraṇasokādīnaṃ atthitāya sadosā. Yathā pana pariccattatiṇakaṭṭhupādāno dhūmādīnaṃ abhāvena parisuddho, evamevaṃ lokuttarajjhānadvayasampayuttā pīti jātiādīnaṃ abhāvena parisuddhāti attho.
469 现在,那些婆罗门以“施舍为首”而安立的五法,由于只是五法,并不稳固,加上“有慈悯心者”便成了六法。所以,为了指出这个过失,才说“年轻人,那些……”等。其中,“有慈悯心者”指以慈悯为本性,即具有慈悯特质的人。显示巴利原文
469. Idāni ye te brāhmaṇehi cāgasīsena pañca dhammā paññattā, tepi yasmā pañceva hutvā na niccalā tiṭṭhanti, anukampājātikena saddhiṃ cha āpajjanti. Tasmā taṃ dosaṃ dassetuṃ ye te māṇavātiādimāha. Tattha anukampājātikanti anukampāsabhāvaṃ.
“你在何处多见?”世尊之所以这样问,是因为他说过:“这五法,出家人完全无法圆满,在家者才能圆满。”因此,为了让他亲口说出:“只有出家人才能圆满这些,在家者则根本无法圆满”,世尊才顺着这同一口径反问。显示巴利原文
Kattha bahulaṃ samanupassasīti idaṃ bhagavā yasmā – ‘‘esa ime pañca dhamme pabbajito paripūretuṃ samattho nāma natthi, gahaṭṭho paripūretī’’ti āha, tasmā – ‘‘pabbajitova ime pūreti, gahaṭṭho pūretuṃ samattho nāma natthī’’ti teneva mukhena bhaṇāpetuṃ pucchati.
在“不恒常、不持续地说真实语”等描述中:在家者若无他法,确实也会说权宜的妄语;而出家者即使头被刀砍,也绝不说那两种话。在家者连半个月都无法守护学处,出家者则是恒常修习苦行、具足戒律、依止苦行的人。在家者一个月中仅有八天,也不能行持布萨羯磨,出家者则终生为梵行者。在家者只不过把《宝经》《吉祥经》等书写下来置于书本中罢了,出家者却恒常地背诵读诵。在家者连一餐饭也无法做到毫无缺失地布施;而出家者在没有其他食物时,也会分给乌鸦、狗等众生,即使是负责行堂的年轻沙弥,也会把食物放进他们钵中——这些意义应如此理解。“这是心的”:意为这五法,我说是慈心的眷属。显示巴利原文
Na satataṃ samitaṃ saccavādītiādīsu gahaṭṭho aññasmiṃ asati vaḷañjanakamusāvādampi karotiyeva, pabbajitā asinā sīse chijjantepi dve kathā na kathenti. Gahaṭṭho ca antotemāsamattampi sikkhāpadaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkoti, pabbajito niccameva tapassī sīlavā tapanissitako hoti. Gahaṭṭho māsassa aṭṭhadivasamattampi uposathakammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, pabbajitā yāvajīvaṃ brahmacārino honti. Gahaṭṭho ratanasuttamaṅgalasuttamattampi potthake likhitvā ṭhapeti, pabbajitā niccaṃ sajjhāyanti. Gahaṭṭho salākabhattampi akhaṇḍaṃ katvā dātuṃ na sakkoti, pabbajitā aññasmiṃ asati kākasunakhādīnampi piṇḍaṃ denti, bhaṇḍaggāhakadaharassapi patte pakkhipantevāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Cittassāhametenti ahaṃ ete pañca dhamme mettacittassa parivāre vadāmīti attho.
470 “生而增”指既在那个地方出生,也在那个地方长大。若一个人只在那里出生,却在别处长养,那么他对周边的村庄道路便无法完全了知,故说“生而增”。然而,即便是“生而增”之人,若离家已久,也不能完全了知,因此又说“刚刚离家”,意思是才刚出家不久。“迟缓”是指生起“这究竟是路,还是不是路?”的疑惑而迟疑耽搁。“呆滞”是指如同有人突然被问及精微义理时身体僵住一般,即那种僵滞的状态。“或不然”这一句,是显示一切知智毫无障碍的特质。因为对普通人而言,智慧或许会由于魔罗的扰乱等因缘而受障碍,导致迟缓或呆滞。然而,一切知智则无有障碍,意在表明:没有任何事物能对其构成阻碍。显示巴利原文
470.Jātavaddhoti jāto ca vaḍḍhito ca. Yo hi kevalaṃ tattha jātova hoti, aññattha vaḍḍhito, tassa samantā gāmamaggā na sabbaso paccakkhā honti, tasmā jātavaddhoti āha. Jātavaddhopi hi yo ciraṃ nikkhanto, tassa na sabbaso paccakkhā honti, tasmā tāvadeva avasaṭanti āha, taṃkhaṇameva nikkhantanti attho. Dandhāyitattanti ‘‘ayaṃ nu kho maggo ayaṃ na nu kho’’ti kaṅkhāvasena cirāyitattaṃ. Vitthāyitattanti yathā sukhumaṃ atthajātaṃ sahasā pucchitassa kassaci sarīraṃ thaddhabhāvaṃ gaṇhāti, evaṃ thaddhabhāvagahaṇaṃ. Natvevāti iminā sabbaññutaññāṇassa appaṭihatabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tassa hi purisassa mārāvaṭṭanādīnaṃ vasena siyā ñāṇassa paṭighāto, tena so dandhāyeyya vā vitthāyeyya vā, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana appaṭihataṃ, na sakkā tassa kenaci antarāyo kātunti dīpeti.
“年轻人,譬如一个强力的吹螺者”——此处“强力的”指具足力量的人。“吹螺者”即吹螺贝的人。“以很少的困难”意为不难、不苦,轻而易举。因为一个虚弱的吹螺者,即便吹奏螺贝,也不能让四方都听到声音,其螺贝声无法完全遍满;而强有力的人吹奏时,声音则能广泛传播,因此佛说“强力的”。关于“慈心解脱”:这里若单说“慈”,则近行定与安止定都可成立;但若说“心解脱”,则唯独指安止定。所谓“有量之业”指欲界业,“无量之业”指色界与无色界业。而此处所说的这两种业中,实际上特指梵住业。因为此业超越限量,经由限定、不限定以及遍满一切方向的方式,不断修习扩展后成就,故称“无量业”。“它不残留其中,它不留在其中”:意思是欲界业不会残留在色界与无色界业之中,也不会安住其内。这是说什么呢?欲界业既不能粘附或存留在色界与无色界业之间,也不能遍满、完全占据并立足其中。相反地,色界与无色界业犹如大洪水淹没并吞没少量水一般,遍满、完全占据、获得自身的立足处而安住;它排开欲界业的果报,单凭自身的力量。显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpi māṇava balavā saṅkhadhamoti ettha balavāti balasampanno. Saṅkhadhamoti saṅkhadhamako. Appakasirenāti akicchena adukkhena. Dubbalo hi saṅkhadhamako saṅkhaṃ dhamantopi na sakkoti catasso disā sarena viññāpetuṃ, nāssa saṅkhasaddo sabbaso phari. Balavato pana vipphāriko hoti, tasmā balavāti āha. Mettāya cetovimuttiyāti ettha mettāyāti vutte upacāropi appanāpi vaṭṭati, cetovimuttiyāti vutte pana appanāva vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pamāṇakataṃ kammanti pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ nāma kāmāvacaraṃ vuccati, appamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ nāma rūpārūpāvacaraṃ. Tesupi idha brahmavihārakammaññeva adhippetaṃ. Tañhi pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā odhisakaanodhisaka disāpharaṇavasena vaḍḍhetvā katattā appamāṇakatanti vuccati. Na taṃ tatrāvasissati, na taṃ tatrāvatiṭṭhatīti taṃ kāmāvacarakammaṃ tasmiṃ rūpārūpāvacarakamme na ohīyati na tiṭṭhati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Kāmāvacarakammaṃ tassa rūpārūpāvacarakammassa antarā laggituṃ vā ṭhātuṃ vā rūpārūpāvacarakammaṃ pharitvā pariyādiyitvā attano okāsaṃ gahetvā patiṭṭhātuṃ vā na sakkoti, atha kho rūpārūpāvacarakammameva kāmāvacaraṃ mahogho viya parittaudakaṃ pharitvā pariyādiyitvā attano okāsaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati, tassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā sayameva brahmasahabyataṃ upanetīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《伤歌逻经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Saṅgāravasuttavaṇṇanā
473 “如是我闻”等语,是《伤歌逻经》。其中,“禅佳利咖巴”是一个以此为名的村庄。“净信”:指由不坏净信所生的净信。据说她是一位入流圣弟子,是婆罗堕阇种姓婆罗门的妻子。那位婆罗门以前时常邀请婆罗门,恭敬供养他们。可是,他把这位婆罗门女娶回家后,因为不忍触怒这位美貌而又出身高贵的婆罗门女,便无法再供养婆罗门。于是,婆罗门们无论在哪里遇到他,便逼问说:“如今你已不是信奉婆罗门的人了,竟连一天对婆罗门的恭敬供养都不做了。”他回到家,将此事告诉婆罗门女,说道:“夫人,若您今天能管住口,我便布施一天饮食给婆罗门们。”她说:“你的应施之物,你爱在哪里布施就在哪里布施,这与我何干?”于是他邀请了婆罗门,让人煮了稀薄的乳粥,又让人打扫屋舍,铺设座位,请婆罗门们坐下。婆罗门女穿上大外衣,手持勺子,在分送食物时被衣角绊倒,连“我在分送食物给婆罗门”这样的念头都没有,习惯使然,突然忆念起导师,唱出了优陀那。显示巴利原文
473.Evaṃme sutanti saṅgāravasuttaṃ. Tattha cañcalikappeti evaṃnāmake gāme. Abhippasannāti aveccappasādavasena pasannā. Sā kira sotāpannā ariyasāvikā bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa bhariyā. So brāhmaṇo pubbe kālena kālaṃ brāhmaṇe nimantetvā tesaṃ sakkāraṃ karoti. Imaṃ pana brāhmaṇiṃ gharaṃ ānetvā abhirūpāya mahākulāya brāhmaṇiyā cittaṃ kopetuṃ asakkonto brāhmaṇānaṃ sakkāraṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi. Atha naṃ brāhmaṇā diṭṭhadiṭṭhaṭṭhāne – ‘‘nayidāni tvaṃ brāhmaṇaladdhiko, ekāhampi brāhmaṇānaṃ sakkāraṃ na karosī’’ti nippīḷenti. So gharaṃ āgantvā brāhmaṇiyā tamatthaṃ ārocetvā – ‘‘sace, bhoti ekadivasaṃ mukhaṃ rakkhituṃ sakkuṇeyyāsi, brāhmaṇānaṃ ekadivasaṃ bhikkhaṃ dadeyya’’nti āha. Tuyhaṃ deyyadhammaṃ ruccanakaṭṭhāne dehi, kiṃ mayhaṃ etthāti. So brāhmaṇe nimantetvā appodakaṃ pāyāsaṃ pacāpetvā gharañca sujjhāpetvā āsanāni paññāpetvā brāhmaṇe nisīdāpesi. Brāhmaṇī mahāsāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā kaṭacchuṃ gahetvā parivisantī dussakaṇṇake pakkhalitvā ‘‘brāhmaṇe parivisāmī’’ti saññampi akatvā āsevanavasena sahasā satthārameva anussaritvā udānaṃ udānesi.
婆罗门们听到这感叹,忿怒地说:“这个两边讨好的人是沙门乔达摩的朋友,我们不要接受他的施物!”便扔下食物离开了。那位婆罗门说:“我不是一开始就对你说过‘今天你要管住口’吗?你毁掉了这么多牛奶、米等东西!”他极度恼怒,骂道:“这个贱女人无论在什么地方都称赞那个剃头沙门的德行,现在我便去让那位导师受人指责。”于是婆罗门女说:“您去吧,婆罗门,去了您就会知道。”接着她又说:“婆罗门,在含天神的世界中……我都不见有谁能对世尊加以指责。”他便前往世尊处。显示巴利原文
Brāhmaṇā udānaṃ sutvā ‘‘ubhatopakkhiko esa samaṇassa gotamassa sahāyo, nāssa deyyadhammaṃ gaṇhissāmā’’ti kupitā bhojanāni chaḍḍetvā nikkhamiṃsu. Brāhmaṇo – ‘‘nanu paṭhamaṃyeva taṃ avacaṃ ‘ajjekadivasaṃ mukhaṃ rakkheyyāsī’ti, ettakaṃ te khīrañca taṇḍulādīni ca nāsitānī’’ti ativiya kopavasaṃ upagato – ‘‘evameva panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, idāni tyāhaṃ vasali tassa satthuno vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti āha. Atha naṃ brāhmaṇī ‘‘gaccha tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, gantvā vijānissasī’’ti vatvā ‘‘na khvāhaṃ taṃ, brāhmaṇa, passāmi sadevake loke…pe… vādaṃ āropeyyā’’tiādimāha. So satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā –
‘‘Kiṃsu chetvā sukhaṃ seti, kiṃsu chetvā na socati; Kissassu ekadhammassa, vadhaṃ rocesi gotamā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.187) –
他提出此问。世尊说:显示巴利原文
Pañhaṃ pucchi. Satthā āha –
婆罗门!嗔恚有毒根,其端却甘甜;
圣者们称赞嗔恚的断除,断除它之后,便不再忧愁。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kodhaṃ chetvā sukhaṃ seti, kodhaṃ chetvā na socati; Kodhassa visamūlassa, madhuraggassa brāhmaṇa; Vadhaṃ ariyā pasaṃsanti, tañhi chetvā na socatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.187) –
他解答了问题。那位婆罗门出家后,证得阿拉汉。他的弟弟名叫骂詈婆罗堕阇,听说兄长出家,便来见世尊辱骂,被世尊调伏后出家,证得阿拉汉。他的另一个弟弟名叫孙陀利迦婆罗堕阇,也同样来见世尊问问题,听到解答后出家,证得阿拉汉。还有一个弟弟名叫宾伽婆罗堕阇,他在提问结束后出家,证得阿拉汉。伤歌逻童子是他们最小的弟弟,那一天与婆罗门们同坐在一间食堂中。‘凋落’即衰败、变为不吉祥。‘灭亡’即到达毁灭。‘在存在的事物中’即是在存在的事物之中。‘戒与智’即是对戒与智无知。显示巴利原文
Pañhaṃ kathesi. So pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Tasseva kaniṭṭhabhātā akkosakabhāradvājo nāma ‘‘bhātā me pabbajito’’ti sutvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā akkositvā bhagavatā vinīto pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Aparo tassa kaniṭṭho sundarikabhāradvājo nāma. Sopi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchitvā vissajjanaṃ sutvā pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Aparo tassa kaniṭṭho piṅgalabhāradvājo nāma. So pañhaṃ pucchitvā pañhabyākaraṇapariyosāne pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Saṅgāravomāṇavoti ayaṃ tesaṃ sabbakaniṭṭho tasmiṃ divase brāhmaṇehi saddhiṃ ekabhattagge nisinno. Avabhūtāvāti avaḍḍhibhūtā avamaṅgalabhūtāyeva. Parabhūtāvāti vināsaṃ pattāyeva. Vijjamānānanti vijjamānesu. Sīlapaññāṇanti sīlañca ñāṇañca na jānāsi.
474 “得达现法自证究竟彼岸”意指:在现法中已自证,即就在此有身之中,自己证知而成为究竟者,证得了称为彼岸、为一切法之彼岸的涅槃,并宣称“我是初始梵行者”。“初始梵行”意为:梵行的创始者、令其生起者、出生者——如此宣称。“推理者”指执取推理之人。“思察者”指探究者,即实行智慧后,这样说的人。“我乃其中之一”的意思是:我是那些正自觉者中的一位。显示巴利原文
474.Diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattāti diṭṭhadhamme abhiññāte imasmiññeva attabhāve abhijānitvā vositavosānā hutvā pāramīsaṅkhātaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ pārabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ pattā mayanti vatvā ādibrahmacariyaṃ paṭijānantīti attho. Ādibrahmacariyanti brahmacariyassa ādibhūtā uppādakā janakāti evaṃ paṭijānantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Takkīti takkagāhī. Vīmaṃsīti vīmaṃsako, paññācāraṃ carāpetvā evaṃvādī. Tesāhamasmīti tesaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ ahamasmi aññataro.
485 “Aṭṭhitavataṃ”意为“不坚定的苦行”(aṭṭhitatapaṃ),它与“精勤”(padhāna)一词相关联,也与“善士”一词相关联。这里所说的是:“乔达摩尊者的苦行是不坚定的精勤,是善士的精勤。”当被问及“存在天神吗?”时,这位青年心想:“正自觉者似乎不知而宣说”,于是这样说。“既然如此”指在您不知的状况下。“虚妄的、说谎的”意为您的言论是空虚无益的。这样,青年以妄语斥责世尊。“有智之人”即由聪明的男子所说。“而您不具智慧,所以我所解说的,您并不了知”——此句显示了这层意思。“以高声称赞”是以高亢的声音所称赞的,世间知名的。“Adhidevā”(胜妙天):即使是最为英俊的人也被称为“天”,女人被称为“天女”,然而这里的“天”特指“胜妙天”,其含义是:比世间获得“天”、“天女”之称的人更殊胜。其余各处,文句明显易懂。显示巴利原文
485.Aṭṭhitavatanti aṭṭhitatapaṃ, assa padhānapadena saddhiṃ sambandho, tathā sappurisapadassa. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – bhoto gotamassa aṭṭhitapadhānavataṃ ahosi, sappurisapadhānavataṃ ahosīti. Atthidevātipuṭṭho samānoti idaṃ māṇavo ‘‘sammāsambuddho ajānantova pakāsesī’’ti saññāya āha. Evaṃ santeti tumhākaṃ ajānanabhāve sante. Tucchaṃ musā hotīti tumhākaṃ kathā aphalā nipphalā hoti. Evaṃ māṇavo bhagavantaṃ musāvādena niggaṇhāti nāma. Viññunā purisenāti paṇḍitena manussena. Tvaṃ pana aviññutāya mayā byākatampi na jānāsīti dīpeti. Uccena sammatanti uccena saddena sammataṃ pākaṭaṃ lokasmiṃ. Adhidevāti susudārakāpi hi devā nāma honti, deviyo nāma honti devā pana adhidevā nāma, loke devo devīti laddhanāmehi manussehi adhikāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.